DOCUNEWT- RESUME - ERIC - Education Resources .... Treat every gun ?s if it wei;e loaded. Never take anyone's word that the gun is empty. Check for yourself and keep yOUr.finger off/the

_ -DOCUNEWT- RESUME

ED-082 013 CE 000 287

TITLE ,Small Arms Marksmanship Manual; NAVPERS 93863.INSTITUTION Bureau of Naval PeSonnel, Washington, D.C.

/PUEFDATE 0 71NOTE 1371)

1

.- .k

'EDRS,-PRICE MF-$0.65 HC-$6.158 .\,.

DESCRIPTORS *Baztals;.*Marksmanship; Milltary-Scienceilitary:-i ..

Training ' -W' ,I. ?

ABSTRACT , - . .

,

1'-,,

The small arms. marksianship training programs.'.

.

is-designed'to achieve proficiency fo\ Navy peesonnel in handling therifle, 'pistol andshotgun: The minimum objective of this pr,ogram is,ta, ,

;., qualify Navy personnel as 0MarkSman,m and ensure that personnel whb,,are issued smallarms,for security, recreation, or competitions arefully, qualified in their use: Chapters'in this. manual cover 'small

. atms-ranges,;basic rifle marksmanship, known-distance tifle'rangeiring,'-bait--pdstol-and re4olver marksmanship, combat pistol

training, care anoVcleaningTOf'-weaTOns, qualificatiOn courses, U.S.' \Navy small arms marksmanship program; cbmpetition-im-arms,. ,-

.match-canditioned weapons\and ammunition, marksmanship trophies andawarAs and NROTC'training and\competition-in-arms. A 27-pagemarksmanship 'dictionary concludes ,the volume. (MS)

r

V

ro

FILMED FROM BEST. AVAILABL COPY

E

U SDEPAGTmENT OF HEALTH

EDUCATION h. WELFARE

NATIONAL TiTUTE.OF6OUCATION' A' kF F

f r3 I ', rf

' fC :(

3

'

O

MANUAL

4

BlikEAU OF,VAyAl. PERSONNEL. NA1iPERS--91-8-637

Li-

0

flLMED FROM t'SS,'1' AVAIL8113hE cOPY:.

1 \SMALL ARMS SAFETY

1. Treat every gun ?s if it wei;e loaded. Never take anyone'sword that the gun is empty. Check for yourself and keep yOUr.finger off/the trigger. If you don't know 'how to open a gun 'tocheck its chamber, don't guess. Leave it alone! .

is2. Always point the gunLyuzzle in- a sa di Action. Never

alio/Ay/a gun muzzle to point at anyone-7-dr ' 'Remember1,1 .

that bullets will penetrate walls, floors, ws9->aad will

also ricochet from-flat hard surfaces. , Poi :imuzzle in a.safe direction depends on were you are :(lndboe:sji;*ieTair on the

,,. I,Y -34.4'(zàe_.' ,7- krange, etc.). , ,

3. Be sure of your target. Idertify, your -dtget );;;.ath cert-Mitbefore ybu touch the trigger. Determine:where yot& bullet willgo if it passes under, qver, or ,thutugh,th:e -target; r"..qu arei-re-sponsible fcir starting the bullet: ,N1Nke certain youltnow where itwill'come to rest. -'

Hunting is of primary interest to many Navymen. Others usea rifle, pistol or shotgun for competitions. The Navyman with agun in his hand has a full-time job. He cannot "Fuess,1! he mustknow!

He must know: -to How the pistol, rifle or shotgun is lo ded and unloaded.

Whether the pistol, rifle ol.'shotgun'ig loaded or unloaded.Wtere the pistol,. rifle or shotgun is. pointing..,

i.

Where his-target S. ,d

What his tarier-is-.:-___:_._,,:m Where the bullet will 6.._::_,_

Where the bullet will stop. 0.N......

L

-0

PREFACE,1

The-Navy'S small arnis maricsnianship training program Is ,

designeckp aChieve.,p/realistic degree of proficiency for NavyperSonnel in handling the rifle, pistol and shotgun. The Iminimufnobjective of this' program* is to qualify Navy perSonliel as"Marksman;';'':and ensure that personnel wgn are issuedarms for security; recreation, or competitions are' fully qualified

Ar in their use In addition, certain categories of personnel whb are*normally \required to be armed 'in the performanqe of their' dutiesshould qualify at the "Sharpshooter!' LeVel. Alf Navyinen ltavedefense responsibilities against overt and covert ènemy action:To discharge these responsibilities the fundamental military.concept of competency .with' firearms is a requirement. Thesecurity of ships and stations .and the survival of .their crewsmay be dependent.,...upan.cindividual proficiency with assignedfirearms. .

.

e

1971

o,

RECORD OP CHANGES SHEET.

Identification Date ofof change . change

. Dateertered ,

Signature ofperson entering,'

shange

r

-0,

id:

4.

,6 CONTENTS

Part 1. Basic Markshignship trainirigand Range Operation

CHAPTER I. pEN-ERAL-.

Section I. Introauction to the Small Arirls Marks-manshipProgram in the Navy

.

Page

1101. Purpose 1

1102. Scope-of-Training 1

1103. Applicability 1

1104. Methods to bp Used . . . . 1

CHA TER, .2. SMALL ARMS RANCT-S

Sect n I. Range Operation

2101. Utilization of Ranges2102. Civilian Usage 3

2103. ,.Weapon Authorization 3

Section II: Range personnel

, .

2201. .Chief RangeOfficar . . . ...... . . . .

2202. RangekPetty Officer2203. Small Arms Marksmanship Instructors

1

Section III. Range Operating Personnel \

5

5

6

I ,2301. .Individual Assignments. and Responsibilities .

2302. Range Officer6

6

2303. Line Petty-Officer 72304. Block Petty Officer . 7

.., 2305. Pit Petty Officer '7

2306. Armorer 7. ,:--

---..-.... .Section IV. Vail Arms Marksmanship

InstructorS Duties. :

..

'--,......_ . T. . .-------. 2401 General , 7

-12402. Individual Responsibilities 8

/ 2403. Individual Qualifications P2404. Steps of Instruction

0'

r. '

Section V. Range Safety

2501. 2502

25032504

Pageo

Ten CommandMents of Safety i 10UnSafe 4cts 10Road Guards . 10

. TreSPass_ljotfce9 11'11Display ,r .F1.4k§ and Streathe,rs

. Cease---Fire Commands.. .COmmunications. Control Spectators

VI. Firing Procedures

2505,`250625072508

Settion

26-01.'2602.2603.2604.2605.2606.

121313

General s 14Briefing . . .,,,, ... . 14

'Assembly Line 14EteadY,Line 14Firing Line 1.4Scoring .15 .

Section VII. Pit Operations' '-__

2701. General ' -----..

2702.. Displaying Warning-Flags_ . .. .. ''.. - . Is2703. Establihing CommunicatiOns2704., Sirvicing Targets2705. Disking Procedures . . . ... . ...........

1

.t.

Se

°

4,-

17

151515

2706. coring

TER 3. BASIC RIFLE MARKSMANSHIP TRAINING

lion I. General

3101. Purpose3102.-Training

Section II. Sighting and

3'201. General3202. Sight Alignment3203: Placement of the Target or AimingPcint3204. Sight ,Picture3205. Importaw.e of Sight Alignmpnt3206. Eye Relief3207. Cleaning and Blackening Sights . . . .... .. .3208. Sighting and Aiming Exercises I

1

1919

d'19202020212121

'Section' III. Positions

3301. General3302. Rifle-Slings 23'3303. Elements of a Good Shooting Position 253304. Shooting Positions . .25

iv

o t

za

s

r

Section IV. TriggeContrOl

:Page

,3401.' General $'

333402. Application of Trigger Control 33.

.. 4303. ' Factors Affecting...Trigger. Contro 4 333404.. Follow Through, . . , . ". .... ... . .L, _1 34

' 34'.-,,3405._ Calling the Sot '

Section V. .Rapid Fire-

3501." General 34502.. Rapid Fire\Exercises 34

idn

,.

VI. Sight Adjustment:

3601. General3602. (Rear Sight \3603. Elevation and Windage Rule /3604. 'Sight ChangesI

Section VII. Effects okthe Weather-

3701. teneral. 363702. Effects ofWind 363703. Effects of Light 37

3704.- Humidity and Temperature 38

Section VIII.. Zeroing

31301: Princ iples of Ziero ing 393802: Method of Zeroing 39

353535'35

Section IX. The Score Book

3901.. General3.902: Use of the Score Book

. CHAPTER 4. KNOWN-DISTANCE _RANGEFIRING .(RIFLE)

ction I. General

4101. : Purpose, 414102.' Training 41

4040

Sect on IL courses of Fire\

4201. General l 414202. Procedures

/ v

d

' 4,

CHAPTER 5

-SeCtion I.

5101.5102.

- 5103:5104.51'05.5106.

CHAPTER' 6.

Section I.

6101,6102.

. BAtIC PISTOL AND REVOLVERMARKSMANSHIP TRAINING

Section 11..Training

6201. General6202. Basic. Mar'ksmanship6203. Weapon. Indoctrination6204. Combat Rghge Safety

Section-III. Firing Posilions

6301. Gendral4:6302. Combat Positions, 4

General.

PurposeDisdussionFundamentalsTechniquesBasic Exercises-Application ,

COMBAT PISTOL TRAINING

General

4

43-43

"43,4445.46.

a

PurposeTraining

Preliminary Combat Marksmanship

'OP

48'. .

.48 . .1

Section IV. Known- Distance Range Fi.ring

6491. General ,. '.. 6402. Prdliininary Firing, .

6403. 100 Yard'Peange.Fixing '

.,6404.. CombatPiston Course Firing,

Section A'. It.ange Layout and ITarget,Usage

6501. General 566502. .Comba Pistol uourse Layout 56

' 6503: Co°mbat Pistol Range_Construction 566504: target Modification ancrUgage . 56

CHAPTER 7. CARE AN CLEANING 'OFTEAPONS

51515252

Section I. Care and Cleaning the Standard ServiceU.S. Rifle .30/7.62mm 'Caliber, Model M-1

...7101. General 58

..

7102. Normal Maintenance . 1 597103. Special Maintenance, , 60 '

4vi

^'J

Page

-Section II. care and Cleaning of the Match` .

COUditibned U.S. Rifle Caliber .30/7.62mm

7.201. General . . 60..

Section III.. Care and Cleaning pf theStandard Service Pistol

a

7301 U.S. Pistol, .45 Caliber Model 1911 -A

Section IV. Care and Cleaning-bf the MatchConditioned Service Pistol-

7401. U.S: Pistol, .45 C- al'ber Model 1311.-A1(Match)

61

CHAPTER E3 QUALIFICATION COURSES

7

ts.

Section I. General, -- , ,.

8101. Gerieral810.2. Qualification i

-8103. Record Firing.... . .. .. . . . . .. ... . .... . . .. ck

62

646464,

Section II. Qualification Courses.of Fire'. s -

,

8201: Course A,f

Service Pistol andServide Revolver 66

8202. Courge B, U.S. Rifle, Caliber .30/7.62min.... M1 or 'U.S. Rifle 'Cali er 5..56min MB? ' 67

\ ,st :

Part 2. AdvanCed 'marksmanship Trainingand Competitions

CHAPTER 9. U.S, NANAr-SMALL 'ARMSMARKSMANSHIP PROGRAM 12

Section I. General

9101. General 699102. Small Arms Marksmanship Instructor

School 69'9103. NEC \GM-0811 Small Arms -

Marksmanship Instructor 70,

CHAPTER 10: COMPETITION; \T -ARMS1

Section I. domktition

10101. General%.0

1

10102. Organization and Training -71

vii

Rr

V

Page

r-

,

*

.-101 03 -: Individual Training a d... tch Shoetin g 72

::.11.0,104,LInteUnit`Conetiti s 721' 10105. tbe41ComPeti,tionS! ..

',--72

10106...-Int&r-Type.and Iiderf -Di-Strict CompetitiOns 72t . ,, ,- .. -..

1

.Section II. :EliniinatiOn.Competitions )

10201,.. General'10202. Elafrict/Type Command Competitions .1003.: Fleet Competitions

%sr

CompetitionsOfficials ,

10206. Range Personnel .. ... . . .

40207. Courses'',of Fire for the Fleet andAll-Navy), Matches . .

10208. Aggregate' Score's.1020.,.Statistic4l Services`

, -! à

Section_ III. Intersd).viee. and National Matches

\ 72°73

75,7576

771

77

'78

10301:'General

'Section IV. Eligibilityjor qarnpetition-in-Arms/Program

10401. Eligibility ,

.. ,

Section V. Competitions-Defined

0501: Natiaal;'M'Adhes10502. Interservice Ccimp'etitions10503. Contsell Inteknitioriale_du Sport

Militare Matches (CISM)10504.. , International Competitions . . . ..... .....

78

CHAPTE.E., 11. IOTCW-CONDfTIONED WEAPONS., \

1

AND AMMUNITION ,. -

Section I. Issue_and Control

11101. General . . . ..':.==:::-...:( ..'.. ., . .... . .,. ......11102. Source, of Supply -... .

, 11103. implementation11104. Match'Grade Ammunition t

.

7981

8282

1

83838385

CHAPTER 12. \MARKSMANSHIP TROPHIES 'AND 'AWARDS

Section I. Tr4hies

12101. Fleet Tropies 8612102. Chiefs of-Naval Personnel Trophies- 86

12103. Chief of NavaPOperations Trophy 86N\12104.. Secretary -of the Navy' TrophieS 87

Seetion Marksrna.nship Awards1

12201: nited.States Distinguished InternationalShOoter Badge . ... .. It .... ... i - 87

12202. U.S. Navy DiStinguished Marksman/Pistol.Shot Badges . . . . . . . . ` . . ..... --. . : . . . 87

12203 Ecellence-in-Competition Badges 8712204, U.S. Navy ExpeitRifle/P-istol Shot M9da.ls . r'90

- 12205.Qualification for. Nav'y Rifle Marksmanship/ Ribbon and NavY PistO1 Marksmanship

, Ribbon .\12206. Pregident's Hundred Award

-CHAPTER 13. NROTt TRAINING AND

COMPETITION-IN-ARMS .

Section I: Training

13101. General,.-

Section II. Competition-in-Arms\

sd

Na

13201\ General . . . . . : . . . , ..-.': ::.-- . . .... .. ... 92 ,-

13202. \Secretary of the 'Navy NROTC Rifle '-and Pistol CoMpetition . . : . ._ ..... . ... 92.

. _ if e COmpetition'13203. Ietyof Amecan MilifaYrEngtneers

R -- §34

APPENDIX I: THE NAVY- SIMPLIFIED '

t METHOD OF PISTOL-INSTRUCTION. . . . 96

APPENDIX IL MARKSMANSHIP DICTIONARY . . . .. . . ' 98

a

PART I

BASIC MARKSMANSHIP TRAINING ANDRANGE OPERATION

CHAPTER 1

GENERAL

INTRODUCTION TO THE SMALL ARMS1VIARKSI11ANSHIP PROGRAMIN THE NAVY

,i1101. Purpose

The purpo e of a Small Arms Marksman-ship Prograi in theNavy is twofold: First:To prepare men for the most effective useof all the service small arms. -Second: Toassist commands in prompting hunter safetyand extensive intramural competition's fortraining and recreation. See figure 1-1.

1102.. Scope of Training

The term "small arms marksmanship"includes all the qtralification exercises andcompetitionsfiredwith small ar.ms and listedherein.. The manual covers only individualinstruction and firing at bull's-eye and sil-houette targets and at known ranges. ThisIimitation in scope is imposed by the limitedtime available for small arms marksmanShip

. training. It is considered that time and facil-itiqs available will ordinarily_ not permitindividual instruction at ranges greater than300 yards. Advantage should, however; betaken of opPortunitito gain greater experi-ence by firing at the longer ranges, provided

-- that. the firing can . be done under propersupervision and without exceeding-the ammu-nition allowance.

1103. Applicability

_ __All ships and stations'will conduct 'a smallL arms marksmanship training program. Under

(,::.,ordinary conditions there will be insufficientopportunity to give a thorough course of smallarms training to the entire complement of aship. Since training which stops, short ofthoroughness _is very iar gely wasted, the num-ber required to be trained should be \re-stricted to the number that can be trained

-cp

4

Figure 1-1 .Training to hit the target.

thoroughly. Modification of this principleshould be accepted as demanded' by contin-gencies of the Navy and available ammunitionallowances. In general all officers should befamiliar with She Service pistol and/or re-

' volVer. All enlisted men whose duties assecurity watch standers require them to be'armed, or who are normally armed in thecourse of their regular assigned duties shouldfire an annual' qualification 'course with. theweapon with which armed.

1

1104. Methods to be Used

The methods prescribed have been thor-oughly-tested by Navy instructors during the

.41

4

SMALL ARMS .MARKSMANSHIP 'TRAINING 'MANUAL

Naval Academy Midshipmen Summer Marks-manship Training Program for the, past threeyears, and..are known to produce excellentresults when properly, carried out.5(In TheNavy,- where training is subject to interrup-tion by special demands of the service, it isessential that the methods of training be

J

Jo'

uniform. Where in ore than one method isused even if these methods be equally good,a great loss4of time and_effort will be caused"by transfers from one `-method- to the other..For this reason the pr,escribed methods aremade mandatory.

CHAPTER2

SMALL'ARMS RANGES

SECTION IRANGE OPERATION

2101. Utilization of Ranges

a. 1\ ..ilitary Usage. Military small armsranges are costly training aids and once,constructed shall be used to capacity torealize. the greatest possible small armstraining return on the U.S. Government's in-vestment. The activity constructing therange will normally7be jesponsible foNtsscheduling and operation, In areas where ashortage.of small arms 'ranges exists, NavysmalLar ms ranges will be made available toother 'military services. Commanding offi-cers will program and use the range as re-quired, to comply with all traitinig-and corn-,petition directives. All units using any rangewill be 'required to adhere to local stationsafety policies and be reSPonsible for properdiscipline, equipment, security and storage,and policing Of the range.

2102. Civilian Usage

a. OPNAVINST 3574.2 series authorizesuse of Navy ranges by civiliaps. Section 113of the National Defense Act, 3 June 1916 (39Stat 211), "Encouragement of rifle praTtite,"and,the United States Code, Title 32, Sectibn316, "Rifl:e instructibn. and practice for civil-ians," 'para. 106; ','Recomrnendations to Con -gress, spiecting rifle ranges)" are some ofthe federal authorizatle-ns for civilian use.-Additional sources are United States Code,Title 10, Section 4307-4313, and 4652, "Con-tinuation of Other Laws." These laWs permitcivilian nse of ranges built in part or wpollyby funds appropriated by the Congress of theUnited States.- Rifle and pistol clubs;' schoOls,college, law enforcement agencies, andother organized' units may use Navy ranges

at times when they are not actualiy requiredfor the Navy or other military services.Navy small arms mark,smanship training andco mpetitiOn Will receive first priority. Other 'military services including the reserve will

r__receive, second priority. Civil:an agencies ..

as mentioned above will be given third pri-ority when the ranges-are not required by thememilitar,r services.

b (-ivilians and civilian units are nor:-malls .required to furnish their own weapons,ammunition, and,targets for training.

c. Civilian units using Navy small armsranges exercise good housekeepingpractices and prOcedures, and return therange to its original condition by policingthe areastoring the targets and targetframes, refading the targets used, policingthe brass,' and other similar duties..

d. Where_ feasible and within personnellimitations, -Navy small arms marksmanshipInstructors 'Should assist civilian marks -manship activities in range operation andother techniical guidance on small armsmarksmanship activities.

2103: W.mion uthorization,

ia.Gove iment Issue

:(1) Small arms ranges are often builto accorrnodate speLfic _`calibers or'teartridges arid ones of similar or less power!.("in indoor pistbl range using' a metal deflecfor plate and sand trap is an example of /a'Small arms range built to a specification. Ifthe baickstop metal4xs of a specification tfiatwill withstand ".45=and :38 specal ball ammU-nition velocities 'only, no weapon or cartridgedeveloping higher velocities or foot pou4dsof energy will 'be permitted range usage.

--Weapons of such potential as4he .357 or.44.rhagnums would in all probability

SMALL AIII\J 1,RKSMANI-1,Z) TRAINING MANUAL

the metal backstop, or at least buckle orpockmark the metal surface, rendering therange unsafe for use. The same restrictionsapply to the use of armor-piercing (or metalpiercing)bullets of any type. Bullet deflectorplates depend on the smp2th surface to de-flect bullets into a trap or,catcher, and anypockmarks, or bullet holes in the surfaceproduce unpredictable ricochets. When suchdamage occurs, the holes should be weldeover and ground smooth. Should a conctrated,area. be damaged; the area should becut out and a repair plate welded in. Groundbutt weld should be used on this type of re-pair... Where questions arise as to the back-stop, a sample of the deflector plate shouldbe tested for damage by firing at it with theammunition in question. Pockmarks in thearmor or backstop platng will receive thesame treatment used for holes. All .22caliber rimfire ammunition of long rifle orless power, fired in a pistol or rifle, may beused on all F.1..nges authorizing .22 caliber orlarger amnitinition. All .221ca1iber center-fire cartridges should be banned fiom therange until tests are made with,.sanil)le back-stop material to determine damage or ac-

. ceptability.(2) Small arms ranges that employ

overhead baffles and earthen backstops forsafety also have a limitation on weapons au-thorized. All students training with semi-automatic or automatic weapons will belimited to weapons firing cartridges of suchpower that the bullets can be stopped by thebaffles. Weapons of power sufficient to.pen-etrate the baffles but not the backstop shouldnot be used for training students unfamiliarwith weapons. Use of these weapons shouldbe restricted to experienced personnel. suchas Navy gunsmiths, small arms markSman-ship instructors, and controlled firing suchas zeroing in weapons from bench rests orthe prone position. When zeroing weaponsfrom.the bench rest or prone position, in-experienced persons will be given indiVidualinstruction and are to be closely observedby a qualified small arms marksmanshipinstructor during firing.

(3) The backstop capabiliSp-is the lim-iting factor when controklediKing, test. fir--ing,- or demonstration firing is conducted

4

with weapons that could penetrate overheadbaffles.

b. Privately Owned. Privately ownedsmall arms may be fired on small armsranges provided they do not exceed the rangebackstop limitation, are in serviceable andsafe condition, and the .owners receive per-mission for the occasion.

(1) Privately owned weapons are fre-quently used in high power rifle, pistol,small-bore rifle, trap and skeet competi-tions, These events may include zeroing inof weapons.

(2) Although authorized for use onNavy ranges, priirately owned weapons mustbe_fired only under the supervision of quali-fied range personnel or other responsibleauthority. "Other responsible authority"pertains to competitions, rod and gun cluband other, activities where -a responsiblecommissioned officer, petty officer, or prop-erly certified civilian assumes the respon-sibility for range operation. Proper qualifi-cation or certification for these personsshould be NO LESS than normally assignedsmall . arms marksmanship instructors.NRA-certified or qualified range officials,NRA-certified instructors, hunter-safetycourse certified instructors or similar per-sons with.. experience in range safety andproper conchict of range firing,

(3) Maximum vigilance must be main-tained during such events to assure thatsafety procedures are followed. Since manyof the personnel at such events may be de-pendents, or civilians who are not familiarwith military small arms safety measures,the instructors, safety personnel, or thosecharged with functional responsibility willthoroughly brief participants on operatingprocedufes, methods and commands. Offi-cials will be identified by distinctivg, armbands, insignia, and the like, which is/ nec-essary and appropriate. The officials willbe further identified to participants duringthe events by the public address system orother announcing device, and ,p-articipants`cill be reminded that full .cobperation mustbe..given to all operating officials. Failureto cooperate or adhere to instructions or'directions will be cause for removal ofoffenders from the range. All personnel

Chapter 2SMALL ARMS RANGES

actually participating -in firing events andspectators are under the control and respon-sibility of the range officials..

(4) EVents which civilians attend offerexcellent opportunities for small armsmarksmanship instructors to better educatethe public in the safe handling' of 'Nveaporisand create a better Navy public relationship.Discipline, demeanor, and deportment ofNavy personnel during these events will bein keeping with the highest traditions of theNavy.

(5) Occasions involving use of pri-vatelyowned weapons, such as competitors'zeroing-in, will. be conducted as the range isavailable, and at times that will not' conflictwith military training. requirements.

(6) Privately owned weapons-should bebanned from firing if they are unsafe or inquestionable condition.

(7), The rare backstop Must also becapable of safely stopping bullets from pri-vately owned weapons. As previously dis-cussed, a piSlol range backstop deflectorplate designed to only withstand .45 caliber.service cartridges and .38 special cartridgesis subject to damage by .357 or .44 magnumammunition. These cartridges .in "factorylbac0 Must be banned from the Mag-num weapons which have been led withhand loads or reduced velocity ammunitionthat does not exceed specifications for therange may be used safely, / Range personnelare responsible determining whether thecartridges are' ralueed in power sufficientlyto permit use '-with the existing backstop.Commercial ballistic tables.should be con-sulted for velocities and energies and com-pared with those of authorized service am-munition. Commercial bailistiC tables areavailable, on-request, from the various am-munition manufacturers.

SECTION IIRANGE PERSONNEL

Zni, Chief Range Officer

a. All Navy installations possessing or'laving use of. a small arms range require

-a small arms marksmanship instructor

42'']'l 71 2

assigned as chief range officer. The chiefrange officer is responsible to the command-ing officer for programming, maintenance,and use of the small arms ranges. The chiefrange officer should possess7agood workingknowledge of weapons and aniinunition. In-terest and experience in small --arms range-Operation-and knowledge of small arms com-petition, and ammunition is desirable. Hemust budget far all marksmanship trainingequipment and supplies. He will correct un-safe practices on the spot. Where feasible,the chief range ,officer should be assignedresponsibility for the ranges on a full-timebasis. Commanding officers determiningthat a full -.time chief range officer cannot beassigned-will assure that the individual as-signed to the position can devote. adequatetime to this duty so that marksmanship train-ing will not be reduced because of his ab-sence, and that the range petty officers and-other 'assigned personnel are well qualified

, and competent to complete all 'phases of_marksmanship training in his absence.

b. The chief range officer in conjunctionwith the, ordnance officer should make rec-

5

ommendations to the Commanding officerconcerning new small arms ranges, rangemodifications, and rehabilitation commen-surate with the installation's mission, man-ning,, capability, weapons authorization, andcurrent small arms training directives, Heevaluates the condition of the ranges andmakes arrangements for maintenance andrepairs as required. He monitors the sched-uling of marksmanship training 'and rangepersonnel assigned under hind The chiefrange officer Periodically obserVeOiring, to'assure that proper procedures and safe pi a -tiges are being enforced. He will appointadditional range personnel as required, dur-ing special events such as small arms com-petitions, weapons testing and evaluation,and others.

.2402. Range Petty Officer

Navy installations that possess or' haveuse of small arms range or range systemrequire additional petty officers to be ap-pointed as range petty officers. They shouldbe competent, reliable petty officers.'

e----

SMALL ARMS MARKSMANSHIP TRAINING MANUAL

a. The range petty officer is appointed bythe- ordnance officer and- is responsible tothe chief range officer. He will assist thechief mange officer in execution of his dutiesand responsibilities. Specific duties of therange petty officer are:r- T Conducts firing.

(2) Determines and'lance as required.

(8) Requisitionsmunition, targets and

effects mainte-,

weapons, parts, am,materials, and other

supplies as necessary.(4) Supervises and instructs personnel..(5) Prepares material consumption

lists for budget programming.(6) Enforces safety procedures on all

small arms ranges.(7) ,Removes any personnel from the

firing line for unsafe practices.(8) Coordidates-availability of range

and student quotas with units.(9) Provides technical advice on range

programming and construction, training, andcompetitions.

b. The range petty officer may be desig-nated chief range officer to conduct firing inthe absence'of the chief range officer.

2203. Small Arms MarksmanshipInstructors

Small arms training as directed hereinrequires well trained and qualified .markS-nianship instructors. The prdper ratio ofinstructors to trainees is- 1 to 500. Navy

\units that are manned with less than 500 per-tnnel., should have one instructor and a114per level of qualification.

a. Personnel assigned to small arms1-- Wilk be required to. instruct offiOrs

and other Krsonnel, in the correct oftheir\ assigned weapons. In order to satis-factorily perform these duties and responsi 'sbilities they must have the ability to speclearly and distinctly.

b. Personnel assigned to the small armsranges should be permanently assigned ex7.cept for work details or special projects--,,,These personnel aTe responsible to the chief'range officer and will assist him as directed,to accomplish their duties and respOnsi7.:,bilities.

SECTION HIRANGE OPERATING. PERSONNEL

2301. Individual Assignments andResponSibilities

All personnel tresponsible for small'armsMarksmanship training must be thoroughlyfamiliar with range procedures, safety regu-lations, and local- range regulations. Theresponsibilities of those assigned dutieslisted in subsequent paragraphs must be met. -If the number of men available is insufficientto.assign one Man to each billet, the respon-sibilities should be divided among the menavailable.

2302. Range Officer

a. General. The range officer or rangepetty officer is the individual in charge of arange where live ammunition is fired. Theduty assignmen s of the range petty officer.is made by the hief range officer who hastne responsibil: y for therange facility. Seefigure 2-1.

b. Responsibility. The range petty officeris responsible for, but not limited to-tfielowing:

6

Figure 2-1.Rang officer instructingrem:tuts.

Chapter 2-SMALL ARMS RANGES <(1) Supervision of !assigned personnel.

He should have the following ordnance-pensonnel to assist him in the operation of therange:e

(a) One line petty offi4er for eachrifle and pistol range

(b) One block range petty offiCerfor each old 0 targets . . as

(c) One pit petty offfeer for eachrifle range

(2) Matters relative tothe assignmentof men and procuremenrof supplies shouldbe arranged-in detail. The need for certainsupply items is equally as imeortant as theassignedpersonnel.

,

,,(3) Conduct of all range: biweratingpersonnel.

(4) Ihs.tructioNOT all range personnel.(5) COordinatieof all training details.(6) Range discipline of all individuals

undergoing instruction.(7) Enforcement of all: current safety

regulations and range regulations.8) Proper conduct of record firtng.to

ensure that all rules governing record firingare obs rved. .

42303. \Line Wy.Officer

a.. Generatit The line palythe range, petty officer. .4Fronhis responsibility the billet. swith the most. seniorolpetty ofto range duty.

b. Responsibilities. The li e petty offir rhas the fdllowing broad-responsibilities

(1) Assignment of shooters-10 relaysand, targets.

(2) Assignment., of telephone talkers,scorekeepers, and. road guards, which maybe made from the group participating 'n.thetraining exercises.

fficer assiststhe nature of

could be filledjeer assigned

It,43047 lock Petty'Officer

a. general. One block petty officer is.assigned for each ken targets. ..,.He assists-the:range officer and line petty officer in theexecution of their duties in Os respectivetarget areas.

RespOnsibilities. The block petty offi-cer has responsibility Tor:.

(1) Enforcing safety and rangeregu-lations.

-2305. Pit Petty Officer

a. G6neral. A firm conscientious pettyofficer should be assigned this '_Thesupervision of men in the-pits-Is a serious

.matter. Constant'",attention is required toprevent operatidn failures and to ensure en-forcement -of _safety, and range regulations.

b; Responsibilities. Tie pit petty officer-has the' responsibility for the,following broadareas:.

(1). Enforce safety and target pit regu-lations. _ ,,

. (2) Control operatioVbfrthe(3) Conduct of personnel assigned to

the pits..

2306. Armorer

a. General. lierga -dlge Of 'dtheH::fi,n4../.. onof ...firearms, the firth: of liye aiwimunitionniay-present ,the need for minor repairs andsafety regulations. For this reason; thechief range officer should be a qualified .

armorer.

SECTION IV_SMALL ARMS MARKSMANSHIP

INSTRUCTORS DUTIES

./2401. General

..Sinall arms:MarkSmanship instruction isan extremely important and highly technicaljob that must be done well.' The mostc,vaIn7able man in our marksnianship training_pro=gram is one who not only pas attained whighstandalit of efficieney with the basic weaPonhiself;',. but who also is qualified to effec-tively transmit thisknowledge and ability tof.-,therS. It is well worth the effort to train aNavy man to become a. successful instructor)because experience has -rshown- that suchtraining improves the individual's overallcapability.

;

A


2402. Individual Responsibilities

The small arms marksmanship instruc-,

tor:s priniary responsibility is to teachindividuals in the effective use of the weaponand absolute safe handling.

,

2403. Ind dual Qualifications

authority. The instructor will retain the re-Spect of the students throughout the trainingperiod by displaying a thorough'Aowledge ofhis subject in a quiet,fdignified manner.

f. Alertness. Even some of the most aptshooters, in the excitement of firing' on therange, will forga or neglecrsome essentialpoint in their Znstrirction. The instructormust be ever alert for mistakes and patiently ----o _

Wo be .a -good instructor heAnust rioronly--!--dorrect thp shoote as often as may be nee-understand all the, steps necessary .to pro- essary,He-musteep the man encouragedduce accurate shooting, but must also under- throughout his ins-&--tretion by making thestand instruction techniques and have certain most of. progress attained, however slight,other qualificatiOns. Theseqndividual qual- and he must check at once any disposition to___ificationg are: . . become discouraged or to lose interest.

a. KnoWledge. The primary qualificationfor an efficient small arms marksrnangiip"'"'instructor is a thorough knOwledge oftheweapon and proficiency in its use: He ibustbe prepared to answer questions accurately,ontlra..subject of marksmanship. He must

velop his ability to observe the action's-of'he student quickly, analyze and correct

faulty procedures with sound recommenda--___tions. .

. . ,..Ib. Patience. The instructor will encoun-

ter many types of men to try. his patience;dull, know-it-alls, uncooperative, aggressive,uninterested, eta. ', All of these types' mustbe liandledtAzith calm persistence; patience,and persuaded.. through .demonstration andrepetition to accept ,e principles and pro-cedures seeforth in instructions.

u. c. Understanding. Akiinstructor with a.good "firing line manner" alsO enhinces hischances for success. The student undeilri-struction is labozing under a strain. He isvery sensitive to 'abruptness, impatience, orlack of sympathy wityl, his difficulties and

, will immediately react unfavorably to evi-dence of such, an attitude on'thePpart of the,instructor. . -.

d. Consideration. Most Men, even thosewho do no shoot 4 1, enjoy shooting and

. stare out with a liv ly inte-re§t in their-work17tt :

on the range. The instructor should consider... this andencourage individuals throughout the----training. ', .. - ;: '')

e. Maiiitaini,ng. Respect. .The fact. that :a5

Pan is assigned.the duties of an instructorclassifies him, to those who come. to him for'instruction, as a technical expert and an

g. Attitude. In instructing on the range,as in most other lines of teaching, a corn=bative "hard Wiled" attitude is rarely effec-tive., A blustering attitude, "chewing- outthe student in the presence of others, or theuse of profane language, merely creates aSullen resentment and destroys the value ofthe instruction. Only in caseof repeatedcarelessness with respect to safety precau-tions is severity required and jutTfied :

h. Providing EnCourage'me t. The in,structor should encourage the shooter byconvincing him that ther e is,Tro myste-ryiaboutgood shooting;- that .the weapon.and ammuni-tion are Iiighly neloped mechanically for

4, accuracy; that p. o scoresare due to lackof knowledge and practice of good shooting >--habits; and that the instxuctor is there toimpart that knowledge and to assist the

- shooter to gain the practical experiencewhich will..make him a good shot. He mustemphasize the fact that close' observance ofa numbe.r of simple rules is the secret pfsuccess, and that strict attention to the in-,structionis essential in ordq, to clearlygrasp every Point covered.

,2404. Steps of Instruction

-

a. General. Marksmanship training, mustfollow certain steps of instruction Which, if -

carried -Out correctly, will result in highlyproficient marksmen. If one of the step isincorreqtly performed, the shooter will notget the &aired results: It is the instructorts:duty to see that each shooter perfcirmg the .

steps correctly.;. L

8


ftwttg ;'44;44b."

Ariee.71.141:14c,

JAR 'A ;1'

Figure 2-2. Small arms .marksmanshipinstructor assisting student in assum-ing the correct position.

b. Basic Steps of Instruction. The eightbasic steps tpf instruction are:

(1) Sighting and Aiming. The instruc-tor must ensure the shooter understands andapplies the correct method of aligning thesights .and their relationship to the target.

See figure 2-2.(2) Position. The instructor must have.

a thorough knowledge of the elements thatmake up a good position so that he can teachthe s4odter the propel; position. The ele-ments that make up a good position are:'

(a) Bone support. (Rifle only.) -(b). MusCular relaxation.(c) Natural point of aim.(d) Proper use of the sling. (Rifle

only.)(3) Trigger'Control. The instructor

must be familiar with the common causes offaulty trigger control in order- to effectivelydetect and correct the error. It may be rec-ognized by,the shooter's reactions Of flinch-ing, bucking, or jerking.

(4) Rapid Fire. Since time is thegreatest factor affecting rapid fire, the in-structor must train the shooter in the correctprocedure. This can be done in rapid fire

9

exercises by blending the eleinentS of goodposition, sighting and aiming, trigger con-trol, breathing, and reloading (rifle).

(5) sight Adjustments. To make Properadjustments' for his shots 'or shot groups,the shooter must be 'taught the operation ofthe rear sight, the elevation and windagerule, and the method used.to compute sightchanges. -- ' I

(6) Effects Of-Weather. The elementsof weather that have an effect on shootingare wind, light, temperature, and humidity.With the exception of -Wind, these cOnditionsaffect some shooters differently than, others.The'histru4or must have a complete under-standing, of, all Conditions that affect a, shooterto ProperiyAnstruct his students.

.(17) The instructor must have'a thoroilgh knowledge of the principles ofzeroing; the _:method of Zeroing, and sightcalibration 40-teach the shooter the correctprocedure of zeroing.

(p) Use of the Score Book. One of thegreatest problems the instructor encountersis teaching the, shooter to,use his score bookcorrectly. Intar,tost cases; this can be over-come by impreOsing on the shooter the im-portance of the score book. See figure 2-34'

1

Figure 2-3. Instructing the-studentin the use of the score book.

ti

0.

..$


SECTION V--RANGE SAFETY

2501. 1Ten Commandment4-ofSaiety1

There. are many rules of safety that, ifadher 3d to, Will prevent accidents , whilehandling small arms. The following, safetyrules are general .but cover most potentialaccident Situations. 0

a. Treat every gun with the respect due aloaded ,gun. This is. the first rule of gunsafety.

.b. Guns carried into the station, home,'or. other placeth away from the shooting area,or when otherwise not in use, 'must alwaysbe bunlOaded and have the actions open, orshdlild be_ cased: This applies in going to alpwell cbming from the shooting areas..

co. Iwzs be sure that the barrel andaction' are clear of any obstriiectioti and thatyou have only ammunition of the proper sizefor the gun you are using. RemoVe all oiland ..grease from the- clia:mber and barrelbefore firing:. '

d. Always carry your gun so that you cancontrol the direction of the muzzle even ifyou stumble. jce_uthe safetcr on until youare ready to, shbot.. e._ He_ sure of Your target before:you 'pull.th'e . trigger. If positive -identification of the

r,target. has not been made; -DON'T SHOOT.I. Never po'int'a gun at anything you do

not want to shoot; . avoid all ,horsepla.Y whilehandling a gun.

g. Unload unattended giis. Store gunsand ammunition separately, beyond", the ,r eachof 'children: ,

h. Never clithb a tree or fence or junipaditch with a loaded gun; never pull a.guntoward you by, therrinizIe..-- ..., .. ..

i. Never shoot a bullet at ta. flat, '.hardsurface or the surface of water. When shoot-

.. ing at targets or game be sure that yourbackstop is adequate. - . ., 0

j. Certain- drugs and'....rnedicatiOns maytemporarily impair sig4 and -reIleTees andshould be avoided before and during shooting. -Do not dririlsr alcoholic beverages before orduring shooting. activities. ..

2502. Unsafe Acts

a. Unsafe acts may occasionally be corn-,miffed on small arms ranges. An incompletelisting of unsafe acts includes proceeding infront of the firing line before' command,- -;pointing a weapon in an unsafe direction,shooting unsafe ammunition, using a mechan=ically unsafe or inadequate weapon; dis-.obedience -of orders, horsep3ay, and loudlanguage.

b.. In order to operate a safe range;rangepersonnel will' correct all unsafe acts im-mediately by command )1-;--if-iie-e-ei-sary, byphysical intervention, as. the. circumstancesrequire. Range personnel Will-then admin:-ister a brief explanation of the act to. theoffender, the reason for the correction, andthe safe policy:or procedure normally. em-ployed. ReaSonable tact and diplomacyshould be-employed during coritlective action;how:ever, the corrective action will he im-mediate and firm. Anyr epetitions,disre'gardof instructions, or flagrant violation of safety.practices. ill result in the immediate re-

'o the person Or' persons from therange. 'ange personnel haV"e the responsi-bility f enforcing proper safety proceduresan practices on small arms ranges.. They

ye the prerogative and duty to removefro i the firing line' dr'range any, person orper whom they consider unsafe. Rangepersonnel-will:maintain safety discipline onsmall arms range by close surveillance Ofshooting activities.

2503. Road Guards

a. Road guards may be required for di-recting or blocking traffic on some smallarms 'ranges. They are not required onroads that approach the fi4ing line 'from asafe direction: Signs denoting approach to asmall arms range and proper use ,of rangeflagS are adequate warning to personnel àp-proaching in vehicles. 'However, if there areroads that enter impact or similar dangerareas, and they. are not equippedNith fences,gates, or adequate .barriers to preVent Arehi-.cles from trespassing, road :guards shouldbe. posted.orrthe range perimeter. A road

10

ti

r.

Chapter 2SMALL ARMS RANGES r-guard will prevent, entry into the danger area ....,...;--7c7 Naval bases 'With large range areasuntil daily firing has been completed and he may have a potential for hunting, fishing,, is withdrawn from hisrpost. Road guards picnicking, or other recreational activity:are generally selected froni personnel who * Recreational. activities will not conflict witharc,scheduled for training but are awaiting training requirements. Where It conflicttheir relay, or who have - already fired. When arises, the marksmanship training hquire--special traffic_ problems exist, a road guard ments outlined in this manual and the Landingpr guards may be used to direct traffic, such Party Manual, 1960, will have first priority',as to special parking areas or over desig- ',Personnel, both military and civilian, whennated routes. When heavy, traffic is antici- using the range for hunting will first demonpated, as at competitions, the local military strate their proficiency and knowledge ofpolice should be ,contacted; for skilled per- firearms safety to,designated officials. Localsonnel to handl traffic.problems. '' - requirements will dictate the content and

b. Road rds - should be posted at fre- scope'of examinations'for hunters; however,quently used Fails or footpaths, and at ri1aces examination °should include an approVedwhere children in the vicin.J:y might trespass hunter safety course. Range officials willinto danger areas of the range, if these Situ- coordinate with the safety officer in deter-ations exist 'and adequate fences or barriers mining 'standardization and restrictions forhave.Aot been erected, I the course. The safety officer will also as-

c. ..Road guards are not required where sist with local requirementslor range usage:adequate gates or barriers and signs proVide d. When ilincange area is used for rec-proper warning to approaching persons: , reational purposes, the date and hours of

d. They shay be required when a firing occupancy; should be posted in the base "Planrange is located in close proximity to the-- of the Day" once, a week. After .the 'recrea-approach patterhs of aircraft, to provite- tiorial season is over, the range should revertproper warning- to the chief range officer. back lo. a no-trespass basis, and several

. ..

weekly 'notices-to this effect placed in the2504r Trespass Noti eS "Plan of- the- Day." Small arms .,range use

/J and firing schedules are required to beplaced in the local_initructionS.` Small armsranges are off limits to all unauthorizedpersonnelizand should be so deSignated onsigns around the range area. Shall arms

I

a. Trespass notices are of two tfp.,6s,those posted by 'signs and those printed inpublications. Publication notices are nor,:'mally printed in/local commercial .n,ews-pap-e-rg-alid-iii-fe-Na-vy Base Ina:ns., of the ;marksmanship instructors land person's vfithDay. Noticest the. public should be placed ' written permission from ) the chief rangeas legal notices in the newspaper ar news- officer or range petty officer may enter andpapers serving the local area. The notices use the range property during other- thanshould give /the location of the range. or --normal duty hours.ranges and state, that trespassing is illegaland dangerous due to the firing of :smallarms. Offices, personnel, arid phone num-bers to call in case of valid need for entryshould/alSo be contained in the notices.

h: /Norinally the small arms range orranges are off limits to all unauthorizedpersonnel. Anyone who -needs to enter arange area, other than the normally inhabitedportion behind the firing lines, must contact-the range office for permission. ThiS is aroutine safety precaution to prevent person-nel from entering a designated danger areawhen the range may be scheduled for live fire.

.

11

25057Display of Flags and Streamers

a. Flagscand streamers are used on s-ma.11arms ranges for several reasons, but pri-marily for t:safety. A. tall flagstaff flying ared of scarlet streamer with 18-foot fly anda halyard width of 5 feet.9 3/8 inches shouldbe located adjacent to the ,.bad or entranceto the range or range system. Fully raised;this flag signifies_that firing is schedulecloris in progress on the range, or in one ormore ranges of the range system. At halfmast it signifies that the range, or one or

vat

5.


more of the ranges of a range SySteni isoccupied but no firing is/permitted. Thefirst person to enter the range or range sys-tem raises the fla.g to the proper position'for the scheduled.activity and the last personto leave the range area hauls it down andstores it. No flag displayed means the rangeis not in use and not occupied./ b. krange has one type. of firing, such aspistol, rifle, or machinegua, and contains onefiring line. A range system is a range com-plex comprising two or more types of rangesor one type of range_ divided into separatebays or ranges. Each range and each_bay orfiring-line of a range System should have anadditional individual range flag. Flag posi-tions have the same meaning as previouslymentioned; but signify the condition of theindividual mange, or firing line. The firstperson to occupy the an or firing lineraises the flag to the a rO. iate positionfor the activity to begin.

c. Where a single range exists (one firingline)and the range flag can be clearly viewedfrom the approach road and firing line,. oneflag may suffice. Range systems that havemultiple types of ranges or multiple firinglines require a range flag on .the entranceroad and _individuarflags at each:firing line.The exception is a high power rifle rangewhere the flag atthe" entrance of the rangeis sufficient to indicate firing irt progressNoneach firing line., that is, 200 - yard, 300-yard,

cl 690-yard lineS.: Individual' range flags.should be flown fully raised.during firing andmaybe left at the fully raised position dur-ing scoring, target Changes, and -While suc-cessive relays are ready to occupy the firing

.line. They should be lowered to half mastduring long breaks between firing, and at any°Sher time the-range is occupied .and nptactifally being-----used. for instance, duringChow breaks, rest pefieds, and so forth.

d. Firing will cease immediately on thefiring line of individual ranges of a- rangesystem when the respective flagis"lowered.Firing will not commence until the ffag.hasbeen raised: All firing on the range or otall ranges of a range system will cease im-mediately should the range flag proper belowered. Firing.'will not commence until ithas been fully raised.

e. Range flags and streamers-- may berecluisitioned through normal channels (see ,

Small Arms Tafrgets and Target. Material,NAV.PERS-15217). The most prominent dan-ger flag is the streamer that is 5 feet 9 3/8inches at the halyard end, has an 18-foot fly,

ànd is '3 feet wide at the fly end. The halyard .

end itqbound with webbi4 and has-a.1 1/2inch"D"ringwith rollers sewed or1each,$end.The streamer material is scarlet cottonbunting. As this .is -the largest flag normallyused on ranges, it should .be used as the'range flag. On a range system of multiple cranges, this flag or the smaller 24 inches x36-inch fly flag may be used for the individ-ual ranges. The "large 18-foot fly should beused for target pit' flags on all,high powerrifle ranges at -.distanceS -of over -300 yards.For 100- to 300-yard training and .competiL'tion-mirses of fire, the Snialler 24 x' 36-inchflag is optional for target pit use.

-L- The red signal, flag, 24 inches. wide x36-inch fly, is reinforced on' one. end withwebbing and has a 1-inch "D" ring sewn'oneach end. This flag may be used at targetpits'for rangeS not to exceed 300 yards. Itis also permiSsible for_use_on_indiV. i dualranges of a range system that displays thelarge flag elsewhere on the, range s stem.

It inayhefastenedto a'marker disc t f andused in, the targetpits to signal mi es.

g. When one rope or cable halyard re--:.F..;quires replacement, all range flag halyardS''

___ _shouldbe inspected to see if others need re-' plating. Halyards may be changed,by splic-

ing new cable or .line to- the old one andpuilling...tn-skQw one into place. Many Navyinstallations bave vehicles" With hydraulicladderi used for elevating personnel to air-craft or fOr changing street lights, and maybe used to change flagstaff pulleys, eyebolts,or halyards.*

2506. "Cease-Fire Commands. .

The command "Cease Firing". is normallygiven by the range_ officer or petty officerconducting the range firing. However, incase of an accident. or an, unsafe conditionthat may result in an accident, anyone on therange, whether range personnel, road guard,or shooter,, should give the command "Cease.

12

Chapter 2- SMALL ARMS RANGES

Firing" 2n a loud, distinct' voice. It is' theduty of all 'shooters to _cease firing immedi-ately upon the command,- regardless of whogave it'. 'Upon receiving this command, theshooter will immediately remove his fingerfrom the trigger and trigger guard, regard-less of .how near he is to, getting a Shot off,and clear; place Safety on "safe (rifle), andground his 'weaPOn. Range personnel willinsure that the condition that caused thecease fire command is corrected -and firingmay resume, .Shooters will be-given an alibicourse of fire to compensate -for the inter-.ryption. The "Cease Firing" command maybe ,executed verbally, by a blast on a horn orwhistle, or by eXposing'Only.he targets' edgeon a pistol range, or :moving the targets outof view by pulling them down' into-the tar-getpits:

2507. Communidations

a. Small arms ranges require variouscommunications for safety. There are threeplades whet dommunicationsas...- wired,name from' range to the base-installa 'On,from firing line to target pits (where soequipped), and from range official to shooter.Good conimunicatiohs enhances safety. Astudy ':af accident statistics of 'small, armsrEuige =°peration. has reSulited in a re-evaluation °Nile-need for ambulance onranges during firing. Having an ambulandeand driver4-qanding by during firing is ek-tremely co ly, considering that the average

'P installation operate small arms rangesseveral yearebetween accidents requiring.

- medical attention. All Accidents on rangesgamut of injuries, which are mostly'.

n r, occurring at other places on the intstallation and are not, as might be. believed,'usually ,gunshot wooiiiize on manpower and vehicle .opeixp,enseS, several safety .measuresbeen evaluated and revised. The anabulan

4and drive.l ^ are no longer 'required. In t-h'eirpjade, eve availalke ;a. serviceable. Vehicle,a first. aid kit, arid telephone 'Communicationwit,h the base installation': Tife vehicle andfirst aid kie,afford adequate first :aid _andmeans for evacuation. If the injury is'seri-on.s, use the telephone to request military

EC 0,ri

atingve

e

escort and advise the hospital that'anerner-encY is oh the way. Before =daily firing,check the telephone system linking the rangeor ranges with &tile parent installation for 4serviceability. AlSo check the communiCa-.tion between the firing line and . the targetpits before firing_begins.

13.. For , safety, it. is imperativethat allcommands executed on the firing line be diS-thictly 'audible to all personnel on or nearthe' firing line. ,A command not heard can .

result in confusion, and misunderstandingthat could cause an accident: 'A commandmust be audible to the Jarthest shooter aswell as the neasiest,- without the necessity ofrepeating it.

c. All small arms ranges require 'a pub-*Tie address system to project' range com-mands :audibly and 'distindtiy. Ranges, notsupplied with electricity should have elec-r trical service extended to them or use port-able generators. A 'portable megaphone may

,be' employed oil small ranges. Distin,ctlyaudible at toth ends of the firing line, it isalso used as an emergenEy standby for thepublic address sykem.

2508. ContrOl of'Spectators4

1

Spectators frequently come to small arms'demonstrations, training exer cises,s,empeti-tions, and other types of firing.' They.shobe encouraged to watdh'all phases of smaarms training and weapon firing. Watchingother pei.sonnel train with, weapons and, firethem can stirnulate interest in, marksman-ship and the safe use of small arms.;

a. Spectators- it be properly. positionedto the rear of the firing line or firing activ7-ity. NormallYr spectators will be requiredto. stay behind :the firing 'line; however inspecial demonstrations or inspections of,fir-ing activities where eXperitnced. personnelare demonstrating weapons, or the inspec7tion party consists of several personnel,observation may be from the firing line.Range personnel will be exceptionally ob-servant of the. spectators and shooters whenspectators are permitted on the .firing,line.Spectators will be cautioned to remainbehindor to the side of shooters and always stay tothe rear of the muzzle of all weapons on the

13

SMALL ARMS mAi-ticISMANStiiP _TRAINING MANUAL

firing line. AThe firing line is nprmallk:.iilimits to spectators: The firing Line a:nckthe,area for authorized .spectatOrs should .,bevietri-Lfefined with proper signs and nia#ing.

b. Range personnel. are responsible `forrange safety and the contral_ of all spectators..Spectators that corlprompe safety or createa distraction to shooters or range personnelwill be removed from the firinglyie:areaand the spectator area. Range-yerSoridelhave the prerogativq to remove from thesmall arms range ?thy spectator: that theydeem unsafe or too distracting to the shoot-ers.

SECTION VIFIRING PROCEDURES

2601. GeneralEach time the range is opened for firing;

the chief range oflicer.l.y. il.F'make certain thatthe range and impact.areas are clear.

t

2602. BriefingThepersonnel scheduled to fire a stage

or string of fire will, prior to firing, bebriefed by authorized range perspnnel. Thisbriefing should be short and include, but notlimited to, course. Of fire, positions' used,time ifmits, and so forth. Safety will also-be included in tke briefing, re- emphasizing'

- those procedures established in this manual;plusiany general-: Dr.special instructions ap-plicable to the specific range. Verbally re-ceiving the courses or strings of fire to beshot is important,- as it reduces confusionand therefore accident potential. If anyquestions 4 doubts are in the trainees orcompetitor's mind, they. maybe answered atthis time, allowing him to concentrate after7wardS on his shooting perforilitnce, and noton something, that may create an undesira.bleaccident situation. This briefing is muchmore critical when the shooter is an annualtrainee and .is not thoroughly familiar. withthe courses of fire or competition. ;

2603. Assembiy LineThe assembly line is located behind the

ready line and parallel to the firing line..

14

Her e shooters assemble behind their respec-tive firing points to inventory and preparetheir shooting gear befdre proceeding to the

-ready line. The assembly line generallypertains to high power rifle ranges. Shootersproceed from the assembly line to the readyline on command of range offiCials

2604, Ready Line

The ready ,line-is:Ylocated immediatelybehind the firing line.\ Here the shooter re-mains directly 'behind his assigned firingposition imtil the preceding relay has clearedthe firing line and personnel n the readyline are ordered to the firing li . The readyline .,is generally used on hig power rifleranges during Competition, but as a prac-tical application in annual recurr ng training,where several relays must' be conducted oneafter11-ie other and...constant control of per--Sonnelis deSirabIe:-

2605. Firing Line

This is the imaginary or actual line wherethe shooter occupies. a predetermined posiLhi:in and actually fires his stage or string offire.

-a. Thefiring line is occupied on commandonly. Here the shooters are given additionalreminders of safety or Gperation, proceduresto be observed, and the stage' or string offire to be performed. Range personnel mustbe very observant during the period whenpersonnel are approaching, occupying, ordepA.ting,the firing line, as this is one ofthe times when a breach, of safety is likelyto occur.

' b. All weapons should be transported toand frOm the firing line with the actions open,slides ?.locked open, and cylinders swung out,or the should be cased. Cased weapons willbe _made safe immediately upon uncasing,and during this process they will be held inan appropriate down range direction.

c. Weapons transported to the firing lineshould be grouriduci at,the firing position with.the actions open and muzzles pointed downrange. Weapons. on the firing line will behandled upon command only, after beingtransported- to the firing line and grounded.

Vs

tr

Chapter 2SMALL ARMS RANGES.

d. No one willbe permitted forward ofthe firing line until the firing line hascleared. "Creared" means all' ,weaponsgrounded with actions open, safeties on, andrange personnel visually assuring these con-ditions by inspectibn: During stages of fire,

..range personnel will have to insure that noone assumed a firing position encroachingtii-on territory in frontof-the firing line, oraligned with other shooters. To preventthisoccurrence, close observance of the shooterswhen they take a preparatory or dry firingposition will usually S-how violators, if any,and remedial action will be taken.

e. Only shooters and range officials willbe allowed on the firing line during stages offire. Coaches and other personnel may beauthorized at certain times for special eventsor training, as required. Control of theshooting and nonfiring personnel occupyingthe firing line is the responsibility of theRange Officer.

2606. Scoring

a. Shot holes that are mostly outside ofa scoring ring but touch it will be given thehigher ,value.

b. ,Competitive scoring will be done asprescribed by applicable rule books, regula-tions, and. the like, published by the govern-ing body of the appropri^,te competition,namely NRA, ISU, and so forth. Small. armscompetitive rules published by the control-ling agencies are subject to constant changeand revision; therefore, the small armsrange section of eacheinstallation shouldmaintain current rules and directives pub.-lished by these various shooting organiza,tions on the types of competition to be con-ducted on the local ranges. Range sectionsshould also have a complete set of scoringgauges in their possession.

SECTION VIIPIT OPERATIONS

2701. General

All personnel that occupy a target pitduring firing must receive instruction in the

15

proper and safe methods of operating thetargets. Target operation during firing cy-cles is safe, only if several basic safetyrules are adhered to. See figUre 2-4.

a. Annual training conducted on target-pitranges requires., half of tt.: trainees- to pulltargets while the other half of the class fires.These trainees will need a thorough briefingpreceding target operation.

b. Target pit' details used for competitiveexercises should be available .several daysbefore the events and be trained by rangeinstructors in the clatsroom and in actualtarget pit operation. Practice -before thecompetitive exercise gives range personnela chance to review the detail in action andto correct deficiencies.

c. The briefing before target operationwill include the ;allowing topics:

(1) Safety:(a) Never expose your person to

the firing line after entry into the target pits.(b) Never proceed behind the tar-

gets during a firing cycle or without per-mission of the pit petty officer or pf.t blockpetty officer. -

(c) Where combinationtargets areused, operate both targets by actuating thefront target. Never reach through the frameand actuate the rear target.

(d) Never leave the pits unless toldto do so by competent authority. The firingline must be clear and all weapons inspectedand on safe.

(2) Duties.:(a) Target hanging.(b) Target changing and repair(c) Scoring.(d) Communications.

2702. Displaying Warning Flags

a. The target pit flags are located at eachend of the target pits. The target pit flagswill be raised immediately upon entering thetarget pits. A. flag in the raised positionwarns the firing line that personnel occupythe target pit. The last person to leave thetarget.pits will haul down and store the flag.

b. In case of emergency the target pitflags may be lowered to effect an immediatecease fire. This will generally not be


Figure 2-4.Pit operations.

required if telephone service is still in op-eration. However. should the telephone beinoperative, the targets should be loweredinto the target pits and the flags lowered.Lowering the targets and the pit flags indi--sates an emergency in the target pits. Therange officer will effect an immediate ceasefire and proceed to the target pits to deter-mine the trouble.

27d3. Establishing Communications

-Immediately upon entering the target pits,after the flags have been raised, personnelwill be detailed to hook op or connect thefield telephones to establish communicationwith the phones located on the firing line.Phone communication with the firing line is

16

necessary for safety, proper execution andcommand of courses of fire, and scoring.Once in the target. pit, personnel are notallowed to expose Ulemselves to the firingline until it has been determined that thefiring line is all clear, i.e.: (weaponsgrounded, shooters off the firing line). Thetelephone operator, upon command of therange officer, may inform the target pit ofthe clear firing line, and the detail theremay then, upon request, expose themselvesabove the surface of the pits. If telephoneservice is interrupted, the course of fireshould he completed before cease fire,clearing the firing line7i, and repairing thetrouble. Should an eme*ney occur in thetarget pit after the telephone becomes un-serviceable and during the course of fire,


the target pit personnel will take the ceasefire procedure given in the preceding para-graph.

2704. Servicing Targets

Target repair or replacement, should bemade as required. Before closing-,the smallarms range daily, the range petty officershould assure that adequate -targets of theproper type, size, and in serviceable condi-tion are available for the next day's firingcycle.

a. After the target pit flags are raisedand while the telephones are being connected,the target pit detail should get the targetsfrom the target storage shed and hang th:mion the carriers. Adequate spotters ;..nci

spindles, markers, black and white pastel's,flags, and the like, will be distributed to allfiring points being operated.

One roll of black and one roll of whitepasters per target are adequate, Pastel'scome 500 to the roll. Also, one flag pertarget is required, This flag is used forsignaling misses. This flag can be locallymanufactured by tacking the 24-inch wideand 36-inch fly red danger flag to a markerstaff.

b. The course of fire determines the target servicing requirements. The pit pettyofficer will inform the pit detail of the forth-coming courses of fire and target servicerequired. For example, slow fire, tenrounds, pull targets, score and paste aftereach shot; or rapid fire, ten shots, raise andpull targets on command (th,. The chiefr ?nge officer will inform the pit petty officerand the line petty officer what the nextcourse of fire will be and what the specialrequirements or instructions are.

c. During annual training, one person willoperate one target; however, during a com-petitive exercise, six persons should beavailable to operate five targets, thus pro-viding,for one relief. Each target puller isresponsible for the proper operation of histarget and, for competition purposes, shouldbe thoroughly familiar with 'scoring proce-dures in National Rifle Association Rules,or those of any other applicable governingbody (International Shooting Union, etc.), the

17

match program, duties of officials, bulletins,challenge procedures, communication pro-cedures, and the like. Target pullers will befamiliar with firing line commands and tele-phone _messages.

d. The following points are not coveredby National Rifle Association Rules but arepresented for standardization of pit proce-dures when marking high-power rifle targetsin competition:

(1; titer a string of rapid fire the tar-gets are pulled down on command and theFIRST step in the target puller's operationwill be to count the shot holes. NO spotterswill be placed in the target until all ten shotholes are found, or in the event of less thanten hits,. when the block officer says to placethem. Spotters will not be inserted into spotholes if they are of doubtful value. `'-is isextremely important, because once a spotteris placed in a shot hole, that hole cannot beplugged with a scoring gauge. -

(2) If upon completion of a string ofrapid fire less than ten shots are found, thetarget operator will call the pit petty officer,and the pit petty officer will inspect the tar-get. If less than ten hits are found, the pitpetty officer will ca.11 the line petty officer,who in turn will notify the competitor, whoat this time may challenge if he so desires.If a challenge is made, the pit petty officerwill plug each shot hole and make his deci-sion. He will notify the line petty officer ofhis decision and will then instruct the targetpuller to put spotters. in the target, raise thetarget, and disk the value of the hits uponcommand of the chief range officer.

2705. Disking Procedures

a. The target puller will be thoroughlyfamiliar with disking procedures. When ashot is fired in slow fire-, the target pullerwill pull the target down, find the hole, andplace the spotter in the hole. The target isrun up, and the value of the hit signaled tothe firing line yith a disk.

NOTE: During. this process the pullermust keep track of the number of roundsfired and the value of each shot by placingon the lower part of the target the numberof rounds and the value of each round as it

ISMALL ARMS MARKSMANSHIP TRAINING MANUAL

is fired, until the required number hotshave been fired.

b. In sustained fire the target is exposedto the firing-= line at the appropriate . timeinterval, and .upon command, the target pull-ers bring the targets down. They count thenumber of holes. If all shots are on thetarget, a spotter is placed in each hole and-the .target raised. The point value of eachhit is signaled to the firing line with a disk.The highest value hits are disked first, andcount down sequence is maintained until thevalueof all shots has been signaled. Diskingprocedures are as folloWs:

(1) To signal a V, the white disk israised vertically up the right side of thetarget until horizontal with the bull's-eye,moved across the face of the target, thenlowered vertically down' the left side of thetarget.

. (2) T6 signal a.5, the .white disk israised Vertically up the center of the target,held momentarily. over the center of thebull's-eye, then lowered. vertically.

(3) rfo signal a 4, the red disk israised. vertically up the right side of the

V

target to the upper' right hand cor heldìnementarily, then lowered vertically.

(4) To signal a. 3, the red di israised vertically up.the lest side of the tar-get to the upper left-hand corner, held 111Q -raentarily, then lowered vertically.

(5) To signal a miss, the red flag iswaved once across the face -,of the targetfrom right to left (when facing the target).-

18

2706. Scoring

a. Scoring of all competitions will be inaccordance with National Rifle. AssociationRules, or other governing body,. as appli-cable. Respective rule li,00ks will7be_co.717suited for current proper procedures andtechniques.

b. Scoring during annual training shouldfollow procedures for disking except that thetarget puller should record .tile score on theshooter's score card and challenges areprohibited. The. shooter will be given thebenefit of the doubt, such as a close exami-nation for a shot hole that two bUllets, mighthave gone through in a tight group.

c

V

CHAPTER 3

BAS!: RIFLE MARKSMANSHIP TRAINING

SECTION IGENERAL

3101. Purpose

The purpose of basic rifle marksmanshiptraining is to teach an individual the princi-ples of marksmanship and prepare him forknown- distance range firing.

3102 -. Training

a. General. A rifleman must developproficiency in detecting targets, Determiningthe ranges to targets, and hitting the 'targets.The factors affecting a rifleman's ability tofire and hit the target are relatively con-stant. Essentially, the rifleman must beable to assume a firing position which af-fords him protection and at the same timepermits unrestricted observation of the tar-.get area. He must hold the rifle in such amanner that he and his rifle form a singleunit. He must know how to correctly alignhis rifle on the target, and finally, he mustbe able to fire his rite without disturbingthis alignment. The skills needed to accom-plish these requirements are known collec-tively as rifle marksmanship'fundamentals.

b. PrOgressive Training. As stated pre-viously, the degree of proficiency attainedby a rifterman is largely dependent uponlearning and applying marksmanship funda-mentals. It is i iportant to remember thatall markstnansli trair4ng is progressive.An individual sho id not be allowed to fire ona range until he has received basic marks-manship training. Basic preparatory marks-manship training is covered in eight steps.

(1) Sighting and aiming -.-xercises (in-struction in the proper relationship of theeye, sights, and target). .

(2) Position, exercises (proper appli-cation of all positions used in range firing).

19

(3) Trigger control exercises (the actof firing the rifle without disturbing thesights).

-1,-.*(4) Rapid fire exercises (the act of

`t'tfiring a number of rounds quickly within aspecified time limit).

(5) Sight adjustments (the proper ma-nipulation of the sights, to regulate "the strik-ing position of the bullet).

(6) Effects of weather (an explanationof the weather conditions that affect- theshooter and bullet and how to compensatefor these conditions).

(7) Zeroing (the adjustment of thesights to hit a target at a known range).

(8) Use of the score book (recordingshots and conditions that affect the bullet-andshooter).

c. Safety and Care of the Rifle. In addi-tion to safety precautions, care, and cleaningof the rifle are subjects of special impor-tance and should be thoroughly emphasized

. throughout tile training cycle.

SECTION IISIGHTING AND AIMING

3201. GeneralAccurate shooting- requires exact align-

ment of the sights with each other and withthe aiming point. To do this, he must havethe rear sight, the front sight blade, and thetarget or aiming point in their proper rela-tionship. This relationship is known as thesight picture. Sight picture involves twoelements: sight alignment and placement ofthe target or aiming point. Remember asmall error in sight alignment will producea large error at the target.

3202. Sight Alignment

Figure 3-1 illustrates the cc :rect sightalignment. The top center of the front .sight


Figure 3- 1. Correct sight alignment.

blade is exactly in the center of the rearsight aperture. An imaginary ..Jrizontal lineis drawn through the center of the rear sightaperture; the top of the front sight blade willappear to touch this line. An imaginary ver-tical line is drawn through the center of therear sight aperture; the line will appear tobisect the front sight blade.3203, Placement of the Target

or Aiming PointThe aiming point, is correctly placed when

it is centered on the top of the front sightblade. An imaginary vertical line drawnthrough the center of the front sight bladewill appear to cut the target in half. (Seefig.-3-2.) An imaginary horizontal Line drawnacross the top of the front sight blade willappear to cut the target in half.

.3204. Sight PictureThe correct sight picture i.s obtaiced when

the sights are properly aligned and the aim-ing point is in ccrrect relationship to thefront sight blade. (See fig. 3- 2.)

3205. Importance of Sight Alignmenta. Eye Focus. At some point in his marks-

manship training, a Navyman may experience

20

Figure 3-2.-7Correctplacement of .

the aiming point.'

difficulty in hitting the target even though heappears to be applying the proper marks-manship fundamentals. The trouble may beeither incorrect sight alignment or improperplacement of the aiming point. If the shooterunderstands the principles of atining, he willrarely commit both errors simultaneously.The reason for this lies in the peculiaritiesof the eye. The eye cannot focus on two ob-je ,ts at different ranges at the same time.If the shooter focuses his eye on the target,the rifle sights will appear hazy and indis-tinct, greatly increasing the possibility ofincorrect sight alignment. Conversely, fo-cusing the eye on the front sight blade causesthe target to become indistinct. Therefore,the problem is whether an error in sightalignment or placement of the aiming pointcauses the larger error.

b. Comparison of Errors. An error ineither sight alignment or placement of theaiming point cause the bullet to missthe target; however, a sight alignment errorresults in a miss that grows proportionatelygreater as target range increases. On theother hand, an error in the placement of theaiming point causes a miss that remainsconstant regardless of the range. On thebattlefield, a near miss as a result of an

. -

Chapter 3BASIC RIFLE MARKSMANSHIP :TRAINING'paiming point error can be as-effeCtive as a "

int of aim hit. For example, a man-sizetart is approximately .?.20. inches wide.

'Conseqiiently, rifleman could be severalinches off his desired aiming ,pbint and stillhit the enemy. However; if the error wasdue to sight alignment, the bullet could-11'6s.-a.nian-;size target by as muc as several -feet, depending on the range., Sightment is nibre important than plage:rn of -the aiming point.

c. NIe..thocrof Sight Alignment. To ensure____th.e--,I"&rectness of the sight alignment, the

eye must be focused on the front sight bladeat the instant _the rifle 'fires. The target,.cannot b,e_ ignored,_ so the, shooter' nustternateTly focus his eye betWeen the .target,and his front sight blade. Initially,-he shouldfocus on the front sight blade and properlyalign his. sight. Secondly, shift his focus tothe target and complete the sight picture.Finally as he moves the trigger, the focus ofhis eye to .the front sight blade ensurescorredt sight alignment as the rifle_ fires.At thisk moment, the sight picture should besimilar to that shown_ia, figure 3-2. Noticethat the front sight blade is distinct whilethe target and rear aperture appear to beslightly blurred.

3206. Eye Relief

Eye relief is that distan e from the rearsight aperture to the ey as illustrated infigure 3-3. The shooter hould keep his eyeas close to the,rear Sight a ture as possi-ble without straining the muscles of the neckto dO so. The closer the eye is to the aper-ture, the more target area will be visible.The shooter should try to place his eye inthe "samelocation regardless of his position.Since this is seFdOm achieved, A is impor-tant to endeavor to have 'the same eye relieffor all shots fired from a particular posi-tion. This is accomplished by use of thespot weld, which is the relationship of theshooters face and grip -(vith the rifle, The

_spot weld will be discussed more' ia_tile-e5C-planation of positions in sectimiill of thischapter.

3207. Cleaning. and Blackening Sights

a. Purpose. .A rifleman can perienco:difficulty in obtaining a. proper sight picturebecause of shiny or 'dirty sights. A shinyfront or rear' sight:, will produce glare andpartially blind the shooter. Dirt can changethe distinctive outline and cause error inalignment. Thus, it. is \important in trainingand in combat to keep the sights clean andblaCkehed. A rifle patch or lint-free ragmay be used to clean the sights.

b. Methods of Blackening. There areseveral methOds of blaCkening the sights. Afew commonly used include the smudge pot,carbide lamp, oily patCh, candle; cigarettelighter, or an ordinary rriatc.44-

C. Care of the Sights._ ___The rifle shouldnever be dropped or subjected to any treat-ment that might burr or bend the front sightblade. The sightblade guards have been de-'signed -to protect OeT-7-siight4lattei,-=but--.eachindividual must exhibit careful handling toavoid dainaging the sight. The rear apertureshould be all the way down when not ,

as the. slightest knock . -1 en or break it.

21.

Sighting and Aiming Exercises

There are three (3) aiming exerciseswhich may bn used to effectively teach the


principles of correct sight 6161.ure. Theseexercises are best conducted Ley organizingthe unit into two distinct groups''called "re-lays." One relay i5 designated as shooters,while the of era sus rs. As eachphase is coinpleted, the relays shoochange functions; that is, the shooter be-comes theInstructor and the instructor be-comes- the shooter. One instructor shouldbe available for each ten shooters to super-visevise theSe exercises. .

a. First Aiming Exercise. The instruc-tor explains the proper method to obtain the

`,sight picture using e M15: sight device.(See fig. 3-4.) Each s ooter is then issued a

2

IN SIGHTING AND AIMING, THERE'SNO SUCH THING AS ALMOST RIGHT

. THE SIGHT PICTURE IS EITHERf00% RIGHT OR IT IS 100% WRONG

device and required to establish correctsight alignment and correct placement of the

pdint. The instructor checks._ theshooter's results and deterniines if a cor-,rect sight picture has been obtained. Thisexercise Should 'be continued until the in-strThictor,s-aresatisfied that all shooters un-derstand the priartgles---:and are cafable ofobtaining a correct sight pictu're.

b. Second Aiming Exercise. The aimingbar (see fig. 3-5) is designed to teach align-ment and placement of the aiming point.Continual checks are made by the instruc-tors to insure the shootersapply the correctprinciples of sight alignment and placementof the aiming point.° This° exercise is con-ducted as follows:

(1) The shooter moves this sights onthe, aiming bar until he considers the sightalignment to be correct. The instructorchecks the result. .lfthe alignment is incor-rect,' the instructor determines the errorand makes the necessary corrections. If thealignment is correct, the instructor movesthe sightsTto- cause a misalignment and re-turns the ainiing bar to the shOoter. Theshooter must then correct the m salignmpt.This exercise is continued lathepies of *correct alignme 4re clearlyunderstood...

(2) In the second step o the exercisethe small metal target is placed on the aim z..,ing bar, and the shooter`-is required to Com-plete the sight picture by:placing the aiming

in cbirstar,elation to the sight align-nientLL'he work of the, SFOOre-f is continuallychedkeil instructor.

TARGET_. :(-12'AINTED WHITE

WITH BLACK -BOLLS -EYE)

and forfifinger 'and move,front sight,intocorrect position

FRONT SIGHT{PAINTED BLACK)

Fignre 3- 4. M15 sight device:

22

REAR SIGHTPAINTED. BLACK)

WOOD EN i3AR

(PAINTED BLACK' EYEPIECE(PAINTED BLACK)

Figure j3 -5. Aiming bar.

. .

Chapter 3-BASIC' RIFLE MARKSMANSHIP TRAINING

.te Third Aiming Exercise. To . conductthis exercise a rifle, a rifle rest, a /targetbox, and_a target disk re requiredi. (Seefig. 3-6.) The rear si t is 12/clicksof elevation and meelianical zero 1.#'"tidake,arid the rifle is braced inshooter assumes.a position beSide!,ther rifleso his eye is positioned as close as/possibleto, the rear sight without touching; the rifle.He places both elboWs oh the ground andrests his chin on the .palm of big' left hand.The instructor sits on the target/box lcicated15 yards-from the shooter. The instructorholds the target disk until the clorlr.ct sight

`picture is obtained. He thengIVes the com-mand, MARK. The instructor . records thesight -picture by marking the,Paper 'with hiSpencil through the hole in. the disk. Thisprocedure is repeated Until /three., sight pic-tures, called a shot group;' have been re-corded. oThe shociter must/keep his eye inthe same position with relation tO the sightaperture for each exerciise. A good shotgroup can be coverecIN ay the. unsharpenedend of a pencil: CAUTION: To obtain valid

__results, there. must be, no movement of therifie, the rifle rest, or the target box. until

or all three sight picture's have .beez. recorded.if any of these items)nove before the 'threesight pictures have been recorded, the shooter

- 1-_-must repeat the entire exercise. See figure3-7 fr efects oferrors in aimingo :

.!)

--"S MMG DMK

AIMING SOX

13"

.

Figure 3-6.-Rifle

17"

RIFLE REST

rest, aiming box and disk.

SECTION IIIPOSITIONS ,

3301. General

A Correct shdoting position is essentialto obtain the best results in rifle shooting,The better the position, the easier it is tohold the rifle and control the trigger wbilethe sights are properly aligne.d? Instructionin sling adjustments should precede instruc-tiori in positions since the sling is an impor-tant aid to the shooter in the steady holdingof the rifle in all positions.

.3302. Rifle Slings.,

a. Purpose.. The rifle sling has a twofoldpurpose. First, when adjusted properly, itwill provide maximum stability and will in-still confidence in the shooter. Second, whenused properly, it helps reduce the effects ofthe recoil. , f .

b: Adjustinent of the Web Sling.(i). Parade Sling. To adjust the web

. slirig:on the rifle for the parade position, thekeeper is unfastened. Pull. the feed end of

''. the strap! down through 'the keePer towardthe butt plate. until the sling is tight. -mov,the keePer down near the tip or,,thaJeecrericr-: -of the strip and secure.

(2) Hasty Sling. To adjust't e wel_2_,-r_-,:-

sling qn the rifle for the hasty positii,''tliTe .k eper is unfastened and m9ved Ito approXi-

Wriately six inches from fethe stock rruleivel. The stitap is then loosened through

the keeper until the proper adjUstment isacquired. The sling is given a half left twist.prior to placing on the arm.

(3) Loop Sling. To adjust the loopsling,. place the butt of the rifle on the right

,hip and cradle the rifle in the crook of theright arm. This lea/!e both . hands free toadjust the sling. Unhook the sling irom thelower sling swivel; then with the.buckle down 1on the hook, feed the sling thr ough the WO of.._.the buckle forming a loop. Give the loop a:'half turn to the left and insert the left armthrough the loop, positioning it well Up onthe arm .-1)/Ove the. biceps: Tighten the. loopwhile positioning the buolde on the outside ofthe arm. As tension ib applied to- the Sling,

0

- 23

SMALL ARMS MARKSMANSHIP TRAI

J

NG MANUAL

FRONT SIGHTTO HIGH

FRONT SIGHTTO FAR LEFT

BULL'S EYETO LOW

BULLS EYETO FAR LEFT

BULL'S EYETO FAR RIGHT

FRONT SIGHTTO FAR RIGHT

FRONT SIGHTTO LOW

BULLS EYETO HIGH

Figure 3-7.Effects of errors in aiming.

the loop will tighten. To adjust the slingproperly, loosen the keeper and pull the feedend down toward the loop until the properadjustment is obtained. This adjustmentvaries with each individual and position.

24

Move the keeper toward the left arm andtighten it. Place the. left hand over the slingand under the rifle, move it forward to theupper sling swivel so that the rifle rests inthe "V" formed by the thumb and forefinger.

Chapter 3BASIC RIFLE MARKSMANSHIP TRAINING

3303.. Elements of a GoodShooting Position

The three elements of a good position arebone support, muscular relaxation, and natu-ral point of aim on a target.

a. Bone Support. Positions are designedas foundations for the rifle. It should bestressed that a good foundation.for the rifleis just as important for good shooting as agood foundation is for a house. If a house isbuilt on a weak foundation, it will not standerect. The same is true when a shooterestablishes a weak foundation (position) forthe rifle.Tr will not withstand the repeatedrecoil of the rifle in a string of rapid fire.See figure 3-8 for the correct and incorrectposition of the left elbow (right handed'shooter) in relation to the rifle.

b. Muscular Relaxation. The shootermust learn to relax as much as possible inthe various firing positions. Undue strain ortension causes trembling which is trans-mitted to the rifle. However, in all positionsa certain amount of controlled muscular tension is needed. For instance, in a rapid fireposition, there should be pressure on thespot weld.. Only through practice and achiev-ing a natural point of aim will the shooterlearn muscular relaxation.

c. Natural Point of Aim. Since the riflebecomes an extension of the body, it is nec-essary to adjust the position until the riflepoints naturally at the target. When theshooter takes his position, he should closehis eyes, relax, and then open his eyes. Withproper sight alignment, the position of thefront sight will indicate the natural point' ofaim. By moving his feet or body, the shootercan shift the natural point of aim to the de-sired aiming point.

3304. Shooting Positions

a. General. The four basic mooting po-sitions used are prone. sitting, kneeling, andstanding. These p-,i';itions are governed bycertain rules conce.-ning uniformity whichare sufficiently flexible to allow modifica-tions according to the body conformation.Some shooters will have more difficulty inassuming a particular position than will

25

others. So long as the rifleman applies thefundamentals of maximum support for hisrifle and relaxation, he should be permittedto adjust the position to fit his own body con-formation. Throqghout position training, theshooter should be continually checked on theproper application of positioning principles.This check is the responsibility of the in-structo who must closely observe theshooter's actions during all phases of funda-mental training.

b. Factors Common to All Positions.There are seven factors which affect holdingthe rifle steady while aligning the sights andfiring the rifle. These factors are the samefor all firing positions; however. the precisemanner in which they apply differs slightlywith the various positions.

(1) Left Hand. The left hand is for-ward with the web against the stock ferruleswivel. The wrist is straight and locked 3othat the rifle rests across the heel of thehand. The hand itself is relaxed. The fin-gers can be curled against, but not grippingthe stock. The left wrist should be as straightas possible. The left elbow should be di-rectly under the rifle, or as close to thisposition as the conformation of the shootertsbody will permit. With the left elbow di-rectly under the rifle, the bones (rather thanthe muscles) of the arm support the rifle'sweight. The farther away from this positionthat the elbow is located, the greater will bethe muscular effort necessary to support therifle. The resulting tensed muscles causetrembling and a corresponding movement ofthe rifle. However, shooters must avoid ex-cessive muscular strain in positioning theelbow as this will cause `rembling. Conse-quently, inexperienced sh;)oters, of neces-sity, undergo a trial and error period untilthey find the position best suited to them.

(2) Rifle Butt in the Pocket of theShoulder. The shooter must place the riflebutt firmly into. the pocket formed in theright shoulder. The proper placement of thebutt lessens the effect of recoil, helps steadythe rifle, and prevents the rifle butt fromslipping on'the shoulder during firing.

(3) Grip of the Right Hand. The righthand grips the small of the stock firmly, butnot rigidly. A firm rearward pressure must

SiVIALL ARMS MARKSMANSHIP TRAINING MANUAL

CORRECTHOLDING

SOLID SUPPORT

2/INCORRECTHOLDING

__Ei=zazzcazcz

SPRING BOARD EFFECT

_ Figure 3-8.Bone suRpor_t_

obtain a spot weld. The trigger finger shouldbe positioned on the trigger so there- s5 nocontact between the finger and the side ofthe stock. (See fig. 3-9.) This permits thetrigger to be moved straight to the rearwithout disturbing the sights.

be exerted by the right hand to keep the riflebutt in its proper position in the pocket ofthe shoulder, and to keep the butt secureenough against the shoulder to reduce effectsof recoil. The thumb extends over the smallof the stock in order to enable the shooter to

26

7,

Chapter 3 BASIC RIFLE MARKSMANSHIP TRAINING

Figure 3-9.Grip of the right hand.

(4) Right Elbow. The placement of theright elbowprovides balance to the shooter'sposition. Correctly positioned, the elbowhelps form a pocket in the..shoulder for theright butt. The exact location of the rightelbow varies with each shooting position andwill be covered in each position des9-ii.tion.

(5) Spot Weld. The spot weld, is thepoint of firm contact between the rifleman's

...cheek and thumb on the small of the stock.(See fig. 3:10.) It is obtained by lowering

Figure 3-10.Spolweld.

27

the cheek to the thumb, which is curled overthe small of the stock, and.rolling up a padof flesh against the cheekbone to act as abuffer. The firm contact between the head,hand, and rifle enables the head 'and weaponto recoil as one unit, thereby facilitatingrapid recovery between rounds. The spotweld also enables the ,eye to,,be positionedthe saiae distance behind the rear sightaperture each time the rifle is aimed and

!Fired (eye relief). This causes the diameterto the rear sight aperture to appear thesame each time a. sight'bicture is obtainedand assists- in Maintaining correct sightalignment. If the shooter is unable to obtaina spot weld, he should use a stock weld byplacing his cheek directly against the stock.The stock weld, if properly used, will achievethe same l'esults as will the spot weld.

(6) Breathing. If the shooter continuesnormal breathing while -aiming'and. firing therifle, the movement of his chest will cause acorrespcinding movement of the rifle. Toavoid this, the shooter must learn to holdhis breath for the-few seconds required toaim and fire the rifle. Initially, he lakes'anormal breath, releases part of it, and holdsthe remainder in his kings. He shoul.lnothold his breath for more than approximately10 seconds or his vision may begin to blur.Also, lung strain could cause musculartension.

(7) Relaxation. The shooter must beable to relax properly in each firing positiOn.Undue muscular- strain or tension causestrembling in parts of the body, which in turncauses a, corresponding movement of therifle. If he finds that a particular positioncauses excessive strain, he should adjustthat position slightly until he is able to re-lax, providing he does not violate any of theother fundamentals:. An indication of, a prop-erly .relaxed- firing position is the shooter's

.ability to relax and still maintain his .'sightpicture.

c.-Prone PositionS. The prone positionsare relatively stead'Y', positions which_ are--easy to assume. The positions pr sent alow silhouette' and are easily adaptefi to theuse of cover and support. Although the pronepositioh -is-used in both slow and rapid' fire,there are basic differences between them in


the methods of 'using:the position. In rapidfire the position must be very tight to pre-vent recoil from disturbing the natural pointof aim. In slow fire the positiOn is muchmore relaxed and the body is° lower. In thisposition it is not necessary to consider re-coil since there is time to recover the cor-

position between shots. Lowering thebody may be cidne by readjusting the sling.(Se.e figs. 3-11 and 3-12.)

Figure 3-11.High prone position.

Figure 3-12.Low prone position.

(1) Assuming the Position. To assumethe prone position, the individual stands fac-ing the target with the left hand forwardagainst, the upper sling swivel and the righthand grasping the stock at the heel of thebutt. His feet are spread to a comfortabledistance apart, his weight is shifted slightlyto the rear, and he drops to his knees. Animaginary line is drawn from his right kneeto the target. The toe of the right foot isplaced well forward on the imaginary line.The individual pivots on the rifle down onhis left side placing his left elbow again wellforward on the imaginary line. With hisright hand at the rear of the stock, he forces

28

the butt of the rifle into his right shoulder.The small of the stock is grasped with theright hand and right elbow is lowered to theground so that the shoulders are approxi-mately level. The right knee is; brought upand the right foot pushed out to the rightpast the imaginary line. The individualthen secures a spot weld and relaxes intothe tension of the sling.

(2) Breathing Position Check. To ad-just the natural point of aim to tIle target.use the left elbow as the pivot point and movethe body ...Wier right, left, forward. car rear-ward until the sights are aligned in the tar-get. If, when breathing, the sights movefrom 6 o'clock to 12 o'clock on the trget, its a well-balanced.position. See fit;. 3-13.)

(3) Position Checks. The checks whichthe instructor or shooter snould observe areas follows:

(a) Rifle vertical (sights level).(b) Left hand forward against the

upper sling swivel.(c) Rifle resting in "V" formed by

the thumb and forefinger of the left hand, andthe weight supported by the heel of the handand not the fingers.

(d) Left elbow well under the re-ceiver (as far as body conformation permits).

(e) Sling high on left arm.(f) Rifle butt close to tho neck in

the hollow of the shoulder.(g) Shoulders approximately level

to prevent canting of the rifle.(h) Body well behind the rifle to

absorb the recoil.(i) Face firmly fixed en the thumb

and stock (spot weld).(j) Daylight between trigger finger

and stock.(k) Trigger finger applying pres-

sure straight to the rear.d. Sitting Position. There are three var-

iations of the sitting position which areequally satisfactory; the' open leg, crossedleg, and the crossed ankle positions. Thepositions used depends entirely on the shooter.Because different body conformations,there are individuals who are unable to usethe crossed leg or the crossed anl.de posi-tion; howevec, these two positions are usedby the majority. The individual should try


TAKE IN BREATH FRONTSIGHT MOVES STRAIGHTDOWN THROUGH CENTEROF TARGET.

FRONT SIGHT MOVES DOWNON AN ANGLEINDICATING ELBOW NOTUNDER PIECE.

Figure 3-13.The breathing oos

all positions and choose the one which affordsthe ;most stability, comfort and e. se of sightalignment. In. rapid fire, as with the prone.position, the sling must be tight so the re-coil will not disturb the natural point of aim.

(1) Open Leg. To assume the open legposition, the sling must be shortened abouttwo or three inches from the prone positionadjustment. The shooter faces the targetand does a half right face. He then crossesthe left foot over the right foot and sits downin place. He then uncrosses his feet andplaces them a comfortable distance in frontof him (about three feet apart). By bendingforward at the waist, the shooter puts hisleft upper arm down along the left shin bone.Using the right hand at the butt of the rifle,he pushes the rifle forward, places the buttof the rifle into the right shoulder, movesthe right hand forward, grasps the small ofthe stock, and then lowers the upper armuntil it ,rests inside the right knee. Bypointing his toes inward, the shooter pre-vents his knee from spreading, thereforemaintaining pressure on the right upper arm.The 'position is completed by relaxing theweight forward and assuming the correctspot weld. (See fig. 3-14.)

(2) Crossed Leg. The difference be-tween the crossed leg and the crossed ankle

29

MOVE BODY TO RIGHTBY PIVOTING AROUNDLEFT ELBOW UNTILSIGHTS MOVE AS IN

EXTREME LEFT DRAWING

tion check.

Figure 3-14.Open leg sitting position.

positions is very slight. In the crossed legposition, after sitting down, the shooterleaves his feet in place and positions hisupper arnis inside his knees. One of thereasons many s'-doters used the crossed legposition is thac it takes only a short periodof time in which to assume this position.(See fig. 3-15.)

(3) Crossed Ankle. In this position theshooter sits down, keeps his feet crossed,and slides them forward. He then bends atthe waist and places his arms as in the open

SMALL ARMS MAR MANSHIP TRAINING MANUAL

Figure 3-15.The crossed legsitting position,

.,

leg position. In the three sitting positions,as in the ,other positions, it is mandatory toadjust the natural, point of aim to the targetto eliminate using muscles, either foot, bothfeet, or the buttocks until the sights arenaturally aligned on the target with no mus-cular. tension. (See fig. 3-16.)

(4) Position CheCks. There are cer-tain checks that should be made to ensurethat the positions adhere to the fundamentals:

(a) Rifle vertical (sights level).(b) Rifle resting in the "V" formed

by the thumb and forefinger and supportedby the heetof the left hand, fingers relaxed.

(c) Left hand forward against up-per sling swivel (if possible).

(d) Left elbow approximately underthe receiver.

(e) Right upper arm blocked insideof the right knee.

(f) Sling high on left arm.(g) Shoulders approximately level

to prevent canting of the rifle.(h) Butt of rifle close to neck and

positioned in the hollow of the shoulder.(i)--Face firmly fixed on thumb or

stock (spot weld).(j) Daylight between trigger finger

and stock.(k) Less distance between trigger

finger and the heels (open leg position).

Figure 3-16.The crossed anklesitting position.

(1) Trigger finger applying pres-sure straight to the rear,

e. Kneeling Position. As with the sittingposition, there are two variations of thekneeling position; the low position (see fig.3-17), and the high position (see fig. 3-18).Because of different body conformations, thepositiOn used should depend entirely on theshooter.

(1) Assuming the Position.(a) Position of the- Right Leg.

There are two (2) different and acceptablekneeling positions. Each positionis differ-ent and gives the body a different height.Low position: the ankle is turned in and withthe buttocks in contact with the side of .thefoot. High position: the. ankle is straightand the toe of the shoe i E.' in contact with theground and is curled by the body weight asthe shooter kneels. When the light foot ofthe shooter has been placed in the desiredposition, the right portion of the buttocks isplaced on the right heel making a solid con-tact. When sitting on the side of the foot,the right buttock is placed on the .'nside ofthe right ankle. However, when using eitherposition, care should be taken that the but-

-----tocks_ar_e coot placed too far to the-- rear re-sulting in-ui-iiiilialiiiCed-position,_

30

Chapter 3 BASIC RIFLE MARKSMANSHIP TRAINING

Figure 3-17.Low kneeling position.

(b) Position of the Left Foot. Theleft foot is extended toward the target withthe foot flat on the deck. A level .spot isneeded for effective results. For maximumsupport, the toes should be pointed as far tothe right as comfortable. When in position,the left foot may be Pushed forward or pulledback slightly to raise or lower the muzzle,if required \

(c) Position of the Arms. Theright elbow is normally held shoulder highto ensure a pocket for the butt of the rifle.The elbow may be lower a pocket can beformed without the rifle butt slipping out ofthe shoulder. The left arm supports therifle so it is important to know the positionsof the various parts of the arm. On the up-per left arm a flat surface can Lie felt, justbehind the elbow. This portion of the leftarm must be placed in a similar spot foundon the right side, of the left knee in order toreceive maximum support. Placing the flatsurfaces of the arm and knee together .rsults in the elbow being forward of the knee,and also allows the weight of the body to' betransferred forward to the left leg. .The leftleg must be placed under the rifle to receivemaximum support. Daylight is seen betweenthe sling and the crook of the left elbow which

31

Figure 3-18.High kneeling position.

assures the shooter that the sling is sup-porting the forearm with the upper arm.The sling supports the bones and in turn thebones support the rifle resulting in a steadyposition. Approximately 60 percent- of theweight of the body is transmitted forward tbthe left leg reducing the tension on the rightfoot and leg, and provides a more relaxedposition. A tripod is. formed with the leftfoot, right knee, and right foot.

(2) Position Checks. Checks thatshould be made to ensure that the positionsadhere to the fundamentals are as follows:

(a) Rifle vertical (sights level).(b) RiTle resting in the "V" formed

by the thumb and forefinger, fingers relaxed.(c) Left hand forward to sling

swivel (if posgible).(d) Left leg approximately vertical

from frontal vi?.w.(e) High position of the right elbow.(f) Weight of the body forward on

left leg.(g) Face fixed firmly on thumb nd

stock (spot weld).(h) Daylight between trigger finger

and stock.


(i) Trigger finger, applying pres-sure straight to the rear.

(j) Sling high on the arm.(k) Daylight between the sling and

crook of the left elbow.f. Standing Position. Body balance is as

important to a rifleman as it is to an athlete.This is especially true for the standing po-sition, when he must be able to stand forlong periods without tiring. Compared tothe prone, sitting, and kneeling positions,there is little doubt that it is the least steadyposition, aiud the most difficult to master.lowever, there is no reason why excellentresults cannot be obtained by applyin!J thefundamentals.

(1) Assuming the Position. In thestanding position the shooter faces his tar-get, executes a right face. and spreads hisfeet a comfortable distance apart. With hisright hand at the small of the stock, he 'placesthe rifle butt against his shoulder so that thesights are level with his eyes. He holds hisright elbow to form a pocket in his right shoul-der. This also permits him to exert a strongupward and re9.rward pi-essure with his rightarm-and hand. He holds most of the rifleWeight with his right arm and places his lefthand under the rifle in a position to supportand steady the rifle. He distributes hisweight evenly on both feet. (See fig. 3-19.)The spot weld for standing is very seldomthe same as for sitting, kneeling, or prone.In the standing position, it is difficult normany shooters to place the cheek against theright thumb. To maintain consistent eye re-lief, care must be taken to place the cheekagainst the stock the same way, and at thesame place, each time. Each individual can,by practice and experimentation, determinethe feel of his proper spot weld. Finding anatural point of aim in the standing positionis complicated because of the uneven terrainon most firing tines. The shooter shouldalways strive to have both feet levet, but hecan move either foot in any direction to takeadvantage of "hills" and "valleys" until hehas his desired point of aim. If at any timethe shooter loses his natural point of aim;he must re-adjust prior to firing the nextshot. The shooter may relax between .ihotsbut he must always keep his feet in place.

32

PY

\ *eh

r#'

Figure 3-19.The standing position.

(2) Shooting in Wind. Some mentionmust be made concerning the technique ofshooting in the wind while in the standingposition. The entire body and rifle are ex-posed to the wind. Wind velocity and direc-tion changes will cause considerable riflemovement. It is possible to get good resultseven with these unfavorable conditions if theshooter has a good mental attitude. Inten-sive training is the most effective methodfor developing a-proper attitude. The shootermust be able to assume his position and waitfor a lull, or at least a period when the winddireciiOn and velocity are constant. Whilewaiting, he allows his body to move freelywith the wind. When the lull occurs, hequickly acquireS the correct sight pictureand fires. Although his movement may begreater than usual, he must still fire a rela-tively well-aimed shot. Unsatisfactory re-sults are usually caused by the temptation to"snap shoot" when the front sight is in thevicinity of the 'target center. Snap shootingwill almost invariably result in a jerk, whichcauses poor results.

(3) Pcs'tion Checks. The points to bechecked and ascertained correct are asfollows:

(a) Feet level and comfortablyspread apart.

Chapter 3BASIC RIFLE MARKSMANSHIP, TRAINING

(b) Weight equally distributed onboth feet and hips.

(c) Butt of rifle high in shoulderclose to neck.

(d) Natural point of aim on thetarget.

(e) Consistent spot weld.(f) Neck and torso relaxed.(g) Daylight between trigger finger

and stock.

SECTION IVTRIGGER CONTROL

3401. GeneralTrigger control is the manipulation of the

trigger and firing, mithout disturbing thealignment of the sights and with respect tothe target.3402. Application f Trigger aintrol

a. Finger Placement on the Trigger. Thetrigger finger should contact the trigger atsome point between the tip and second joint.of th, finger. The placing of the trigger fin-ger on the trigger is an i ..dividual prefer-ence and depends greatly L the size of theshOoters' hand and the mann Dr in which hegrips the stock of the weapon.

b. Phases of Trigger Movement. Themovement of the trigger to the rear isbroken down into two pha-es:

(1) Trigger Slack. Trigger slack isthat initial movement of the trigger which isrelatively free of resistance. When the slackis taken up on the trigger, there is a moredefinite resistance encountered which is-thebeginning of the trigger weight.

(2) Trigger Weight. The trigger weight(usually between four and onP.-half to sevenand o:ie-half pounds) determies the amountof tiigger pressure the shooter must applywithout disturbing sight alicr,nmenG-

c. Technique of Trigger Control. Duringthe firing process the slack should be takenup quickly and a gradual increase as long asthe sight alignment and sight picture remaingood. Trigger control is very importantsince the sight picture ,cannot be held inalignment Continuously. The shooter mustbe able to stop pressure on the trigger when

the sight picture is not good. The shooterwill apply pressure to a point when he willknow that only a small additional pressureon the trigger will cause the hammer to fall.He then applies-this small additional.. pres-sure when- the sights are aligned without

. causing movement in the weapon.

33

3403. Factors Affecting Trigger Control

-a. General. The upper part of the triggerfinger should be kept'clear of the stock toallow a "front-to-rear" movement in themanipulation of the trigger. The fingertouching the side of the stock will causepressure to be applied at a slight anglerather than straight to the rea:. Such a sidepressure, no matter how slight, will tend topull the sights off the target. A firm gripwith the hand on the rifle stock is essentialfor good trigger control. The hand must beanchored in order for the trigger finger andtrigger to move instead of- the hand when thetrigger weight is encountered. This firmgrip should. be maintained by the three fin-gers and thumb of the hand holding theweapon's stock. If the shooter has a loosegrip when applying pressure on the triggerwith the finger, the loose hand must anchoritself by tightening its grip on the stock be-fore enough finger pressure can be exerted

-'to move the tyigge:c. Therefore, a shooterthinks he is pressing the trigger, when, inreality, ail he is doing is squeezing thestock. This, in turn, leads to a combinationof errors.

b. Common Errors. Trigger control isthe, most difficult marksmanship skill forthe inexperienced shooter to master. Themajority-of shooting errors stem directly orindirectly from the improper application ofthis technique. The following are some ofthe more common errors:

(1) The Flinch. The flinch is theshooter's reaction to the anticipated recoilof the exploding round. It is indicated by theshooter moving his head, closing his eyes,tensing his left arm, moving his shoulder tothe rear, or a combination of these.

(2) The Buck. The buck is an attemptby the shooter to take up the recoil, just


before the weapon fires, by tensing hisshoulder muscles and moving his shoulderfor ward.

(3) The Jerk. The jerk is an attemptby the shooter to make the rifle fire at acertain time by rapidly applying pressure onthe trigger and disturbing the alignment ofthe sights with respect to the target.

3404. Follow Through

Follow through is the continued applica-tion of the fundamentals after each round hasbeen fired. That is, the shooter does notshift his position, move his head, or let themuzzle of the rifle drop until a few momentsafter the rifle has been fired. This proce-dure will ensure that there is no unduemovement of the rifle until after the roundis fired and from a training viewpoint. canassist the shooter to correct his own errors.By knowing his sight picture the instant theround is fired, ttw shoo er can analyze hisshot group in relation o his sight pictureand correct himself accordingly. In combat,follow through allows the individual to ob-serve the strike of his bullet in relation tohis aiming point, enabling him, if necessary,to adjust his aiming point and fire a secondround:

3405. Calling the Shot

In calling the shot, the shooter predictswhere the shot will hit on ,thetarget.. Thisis done both while Snapping-in and firing onthe range. The shooter calls the shot bynoting where on the target the sights werewhen the round went off. If iv.' is not callingthe shot (i.e., the shot very seldorrthits thetarget where the shooter called it), he maybe jerking the trigger or doing somethingelse wrong. This helps both the shooter andthe instructor to correct mistakes. If it isdetermined that the shooter is controllingthe trigger and performing all the other fun-damentals correctly, and still is not callingthe shpts, 2. sight change may be necessary.Calling the shot can help both the shooterand the instructor find out if the elevationand/or windage is correct.

SECTION VRAPID FIRE

35n1. General

There is no basic difference betweenrapid and slow fire. Accuracy in both re-quires each shOt to be properly aimed, posi-tion, and trigger control. Rapid fire is noth-ing more than a series of slow fire.- shotsfired with a shorter time interval betweenshots. Time is saved and speed is gained byblending the elements of good position. sight-ing and aiming, trigger control, controlled,breathing, and reloading into a smooth co-ordinated rhythm or cadence.

3502. Rapid Fire Exercises

The teaching of rapid fire can be accom-plished bying three rapid fire exercises:The one shot exercise, reloading exercise,and the ten'shot exercise. These exercisesare best taught utilizing the instructor-pupilmethod during dry or live firing practice.

a. One Shot Exercise. In the. one shotexercise the shooter must be able to assume

position rapidly And fire the first shot.The shooter first assumes his regular posi-tion and adjusts his natural point of aim tothe target. The shooter then rises and oncommand; retakes his position rapidly, re-adjusts his natural point of aim, if neces-sary, and applies the correct trigger controlto fire the shot withiirthe specified time limit(generally, -11 seconds for sitting and 12seconds for prone).

b. Reloading Exercises. Reloading withthe service rifle is time consuming; how-ever, with practice it can be accomplishedsmoothly and with a minimum of wasted timeand motion. It must be remembered that theloaded clip should always be placed in theweb belt, bullets down. When the shootercompletes firing the first 2 rounds, he dropsthe butt of the rifle to the ground. Reachingto the rear. he removes the loaded clip fromthe belt and inserts the clip in the weapon.(See fig. 3-20.)

c. Ten Shot Exercise. In the ten shotexercise, the shooter is required to quickly

34


Via:..

r,

of

3602. Rear SightThe rear sight (see fig. 3-21) of the serv-

ice rifle has an elevation knob and a windageknob which areused tp Move-the Jean aper-ture up or r-affriight: or left respec-4

hanging the ,position of the rearsight aperture causes a corresponding change

61t in the location of the strike of the bullet.The elevation knob affects the vertical loca-tion &f the strike of the bullet, while thewindage knob affects the horizontal location.Both knobs make an audible click when theyare turned. Each click changes the strike ofthe bullet a specific distance, depending onthe range to the target. When the elevation

4/1.,L_H knob is set on zero elevation run all the wayclOwn, and the index line on the rear sightmovable base is aligned with the center index

on the receiver, the rifle is set at me-chanidal zero.

Figure 3-20.Reloading the service rifle inthe sitting position with an 8-round clip.

assume a good position, and apply the propertrigger control in firing the initial two-rounds. He is then required to reloadquickly, 'reassume his position, aim,' andapply the proper trigger control in firing theremaining rounds within the specified timelimit. The dry firing of this exercise willbe more beneficial if the man acting as theinstructor strikes the operating rod handleto the rear following each shot to cock therifle to stimulate recoil. Dummy roundsohould be used if they are available. In bothdry and live firing, it is important for theshooter to establish a definite cadence offiring 10 rounds in regular, short,intervalswithin'a specified time limit.

SECTION in ;

SIGHT ADJUSTMENT

3601. General

Following training in fundamentals, theshooter must zero his service rifle. To ac-complish this he must first learn the opera-tion of the rear sight, the use of the eleva-tion and windage rules, and how to computesight changes.

35

.1YA

REAR. APERATURE

ELEVALONKNOB

RECEIVER CENTER INDEX LINE

Figure 3-21.The rear sight.

3603. Elevation and Windage Rule

The rule is based on one minute of eleva-tion or windage moving the strike of the bul-let 1 inch on the target for each 100 yards ofrange. To compute distance one minute willmove the strike of a bullet at any given dis-tance, the range, in hundreds of yards ismultiplied bi 1.

3604, Sight Changes

To make sight changes the shooter firstlocates the center of his shot group and then

SMALL ARMS. MARKSMANSHIP TRAINING MANUAL

determines the distance between it and thedesired location. 'The distance in elevationis determined horitOntally. These distancesare converted to minutes by using the eleva-tion and windage rule. As a general rule,bold adjustments will prove more advanta-geous to the shooter. For example, if theshooter cannot, decide whether to move twoor three minutes he should normally makethe adjustment requiring the greater numberof minutes. To raise the strike of the bulletthe shooter .must increase the number ofminutes of elevation. Conversely, he mustdecrease the elevation to lower the strike ofthe bullet on the target. Right windagemoves the strike of the bullet to the right;and left-windage moves it to the left.

SECTION VIIEFFECTS OF THE WEATHER

3701. General

In the case of a highly trained rifleman,effects of the weather are a primary causeof error in the strike of the bullet. Thewind, light, temperature, and humidity allhave some effect on the bullet, the shooter,or both. Some of these effects such as tem-perature and humidity are relatively insig-nificant since.' most shooting is done underaverage conditions. However, shooting issometimes done under extremes of weatherso their effects must be explained along withthe effects of wind and light.

3702. Effects of Wind

a. ,General. The condition which con-stantly presents the greatest problem to theshooter is the wind. Wind has a consider-able effect on the bullet and it increases withthe range. This is due primarily to in-creased resistance of the air as the velocityis reduced and the resultant loss of stability.Wind, also has a considerable effect on theshoOter, particularly in the standing posi-tion. The stronger the wind, the more diffi-culty he has ,in holding the rifle steady. Theeffect can be partially offset with good train-ing and conditioning.

b. Classification of Winds. Winds areclassified according to the direction fromwhich they are blowing in relation to the di-rection of fire. The "clock system" (seefig. 3.-22) is used to indicate this direction.A wind blowing from right to leftacross the shooter's front is called a"3 o'clock wind." A wind blowing toward theshooter from his front is called a "12 o'clockwind." The direction from which the wind isblowing also denotes the value of the wind.Winds from either flank are "full valuewinds," those from the oblique are "half fullwinds," and winds blowing from either thefront or rear are "no value winds." A halfvalue wind will affect the bullet approxi-mately half as much as a full value wind.That is, a 1 o'clockwind having a velocity of10 miles per hour is equivalent to a 5-mileper hour 3 o'clock wind. For basic firing,the effect of a no value wind on the bullet isnegligible and may be discounted.

Figure 3-22.Wind direction bythe clock system.

LINE

c. Wind Velocity. There are three com-mon field expedient methods of determiningwind velocities. Since the situation may limitthe use of some methods, individuals mustbe thoroughly familiar with all techniques.

(1) Flag Method, (See fig. 3-23.) If ashooter can observe a flag (or any clothlike


WIND

Figure 3-23.Determining windvelocity by the flag method.

material similar to a flag) hanging from apole, he should estimate the angle (in de -gr ees) formed at the juncture of the flag andthe pole. Dividing this angle by the constantnumber "4" will give the approximate windvelocity in miles per hour.

(2) Pointing- Method. (See fig. 3-24.)f no flag is visible, a piece ci paper or

other light material may be droppea fromthe shoulder. By pointing directly at li:espot where it lands, the angle (in degrees)can be estimated. This figure is ag-a- .1 di-vided by the number "4" to determine theapproximate wind velocity in miles per hour.

WIND

Figure 3-24.Determining wind velocity bythe pointing method.

37

(3) Observation Method. If the situa-tion preventS the use of the above two meth-ods, shooters can use the following informa-tion in determining wind velocities : --

(a) Under 3 miles per hour, windscan hardly be felt, but the presence of slightwind can be determined by drifting smoke.

(b) A 3 to 5 mile per hkr wind canbe felt lightly on the face.

(c) Winds of 5 to 8 miles per hourkeep tree leaves in constant motion.

(d) At 8 to 12 miles per hour,winds will .raise dust and loose paper.

(e) A'12 to 15 mile per hour windwill cause small trees to sway.

d. Determination of Windage Adjustment.After finding the wind direction and velocity,the windage correction to be placed on therear sight is determined by the formulaR x V/15 = number of minutes!: of windageto be placed on the rear sight for''a full valuewind. In this formula, R = range in hun-dreds of yards, V = velocity in miles perhour, and the number 15 is constant. Forhalf value winds, divide the answer by .2. Inplacing the computed adjustment on the rearsight. THE REAR SIGHT APERTURE MUSTALWAYS BE MOVED INTO THE WIND. Thatis for winds blowing from 12:3 through5:30 o'clock, the rear sight aperture mustbe moved to the right. Conversely, the rearsight aperture must be moved to the left forwinds blowing from 6:30 to 11:30 o'clock.An example of col uting a windage adjust-ment i s s: A 10 mile per hour windis blowing from 9 o'clock. The range to thetarget is 600 yards. Converting this infor-mation for use in the wind formula, R = 6and V= 10. Thus, R x V/15 - 6 x 10/15 =60/15 = 4 minutes (left windage). To placethis adjustment on the sight, the windageknob is turned four minutes to the rear(counterclockwise), moving the rear sightaperture four minutes to the left or into thewind.

3703. Effects of Light

This subject is very controversial aslight may or may not have an effect on theshooter's aim. The difficulty is that lightaffects different people in different ways;


therefore, it is believed that nothing can bepresentee' as an iron-clad fact. The generaltendency, however, is for the rifleman toshoot high on a dull, cloudy day, and low on abright, clear day. This is especially true ona day with intermittent clouds. On a brightday, when the sun is directly on-the face ofthe target, an apparent halo forms aroundthe bull's-eye causing the aim to be low. Ona dull day. the halo is gone and the tendencyis to hold closer to the point of aim, causingthe shots to go high. ''Extreme light condi-tions from the left or the right may have aneffect on the horizontal impact of a shot orshot group. To solve the prOblem of lightana its effects, the individual shooter mustaccurately record the light conditions underwhich he is shooting. Through experienceand study he will eventually determine theeffect of light on his zero.

3704. Humidity and Temperature

a. Desirable Atmospheric Conditions forZeroing. The most desirable atmosphericconditions for zeroing a rifle are consideredto be 70 degrees F. with the air'' 2/3 "satu-rated with moisture and a barometric pres-sure of 30 inches of mercury. These condi-tions are considered the standard from whichballistic charts art computed. Any deviationfrom these conditiOns will affect the strikeof the bullet to sony: degree.

b. Humidity, To understand the effect ofhumidity on the strike of the bullet, one mustrealize that the higher the humidity (denserair), the more resistance- to the flight of thebullet through it. This resistance will tendto slow down the bullet and as a result, theshooter must raise his elevation to compen-sate for it. The effects of numidity at theshort ranges are not as noticeable as at thelonger ranges. Again, the experience of theshooter and his resultant study of hits andgroups under varied conditions of humiditywill determine the effect of humidity on hiszero. Much more could be written in refer-ence to the effects of weather on the strike ofthe bullet. Certain combinations of weatherwill have different effects on the bullet thanothers. For this reason, a shooter may fire

'.we successive days on the same range andunder what appears to be the same conditionand yet utilize two different sight settings.For example, a rise in the humidity of say30r.', cannot always be determined readily.This rise in humidity makes the air moredense. If this heavier air :s present with a10 m.p.h. wind, it will require more eleva-tion and more windage to hit the same loca-tion than on a clay when the humidity w.,530(70 lower.

c. Temperature. Temperature has theopposite effect on the bullet than humidity,inasmuch as higher temperatures of barreland powder will increase chamber pressureand consequently the muzzle velocity. Thisincrease will cause the bullet to impacthigher and requires the lowering of the ele-vation. Inversely, a drop in the temperaturewill require the shooter to raise his sightsin order to hit the target in the same place.Arsenal tests indicate a variation in velocityof about 1.7 feet per second per degree oftemperature, exclusive of the humidity factor.

d. Humidity vs. Temperature. From thepreceding two paragraphs, the shooter maydeduce rightfully that certain combinationsof temperature and humidity will have little

, or no effect on his zero. For example, highhumidity combined with high temperaturesmay affect the bullet the same as the quotednormal, since the humidity sets'up a ''drag"while temperature increases velocity andone overcomes the other. In the same man-ner, low humidity will allow the billet topass through the air with little resistanceand temperatures slightly below normal willnot slow the bullet sufficiently to cause achange in elevation. Other combinationssuch as high temperature and low humidityor high humidity and low temperature willhave an opposite effect.

e. Considering All Effects of Weather.In considering all of the effects of weather,many shooters tend to overemphasize cer-tain effects and this will produce low scoresfrom time to time. Proper recording andstudy based on experience are all importantwith respect to determining the effects ofweather. Probably one of the most difficultthings to impress upon a shooter is the evi-dence of a.probable change in his zero. If a

38

Chapter 3- -BASIC RIFLE MARKSMANSHIP TRAINING

change is indicated, it should be applied atall ranges.

SECTION VIIIZEROTNG

3801. Principles of Zeroing

a. Bullet Path and Point of Aim. To un-derstand the principles of zeroing, the-shootershould have a basic knowledge of the rela-tionship between the path of the bullet inflight and the line of aim. In flight a bulletdoes not follow-a straight line but travels ina curve or arc which is called its trajectory.(See fig. 3-25.) The maximum height of abullet's trajectory depends on the range tothe target. The greater the distance a bullettraVals_before impact, the higher it musttravel in its-trajectory. On the other hand,the line of aim is a straight line from theeye through the rear sight aperture, acrossthe front sight, to the aiming point or target.So it follows that after the bullet leaves therifle, it is _initially =via); in an upwardpath, intersecting the. line of aim. As thebullet travels farther, it begins to drop andwill eventually again intersect the line ofaim. T1Ae range at which this intersectionoccurs is the zero for that sight setting.

b. Definition of Zero. The zero of a rifleis the sight setting in elevation and windagerequired to place a shot, or the center of ashot group, in the center of the target at a

given range when no wind is blowing. Expe-rience has shown that the best way to zero arifle is to Shoot in the position, range, andcadence at which we intend to use it.

3802. Method of Zeroing

a. General. The method of zeroing de-scribed in this paragraph will establish anaccurate zero providing all shots are re-corded in the score book, and provided theinformation in the score book is used inprojecting zero changes. Also, the windmust be taken into consideration in deter-mining windage zero. For example, if thewind velocity required three minutes left ofthat used in hitting the center of the target.

b. The 200 Yard Line. The initial zero-ing phase sho start at the 200 yard linewith the si its set at 8 minutes elevationand mechanical zero windage. To facilitatedeterminiue the 200 yard zero quickly, it issuggested that the rounds be fired slow firein the sitting pr ition. When the slow fireshots are strik :-. near the center of the tar-get, three 3- ..end shot groupS are fired inrapid fire ca.:ence, followed by a rapid firestring of d. During this firing, sightchanges a7- made to bring the group into thecenter c- the target. Often the rapid firezero v be different from the slow firezero. . his is due to a difference in positionand trigger control. Therefore, it is neces-sary to establish a slow fire zero. To do

simply fire several rounds slow fire

TRAJECTOR

LINE OF SIGHT

POINT OFAIM

300 YARDS

3-25.Trajectory of a bullet.

39

SMALL 'ARMS MARKSMANSHIR7TRAINING MANUAL

from the appropriate position and call eachshot accurately. When the shots appear onthe target "on call," then the slow fire zerois obtained.

c. The 300 Yard and 500/600 Yard Lines,The 300 yard slow fire and rapid fire zerois determined by firing the same exercisesas were fired at the 200 yard line; 'while at500/600 yards single shots are fired untilthe group is centered in the target. Thenormal sight change is up three minutesfrom 200 to 300 yards aiid up ten minutesfrom 300 to 500/600 yards.

SECTION IXTHE SCOR.0 BOOK

3901. General'The score book is-used to record every

shot fired by the shooter. It is also used torecord the weather conditions and their ef-fects on the shooter. If used properly, itwill provide the necessary information forinitial sight settings at each range. It pro-vides a basis for analyzing the performanceof the shooter and his rifle, and is a valu-able aid in making bold and accurate sightchanges. Instruction in the use of the scorebook must be given prior to firing any rounds10 zeroing or practice. This instructionshould be integrated with the instruction onefOcts of weather, since these subjects areinterrelated. Although this instruction is riotdirectly concerned with the individual's skillin applying the fundamentals o; marksinp-ship, it is a vital phase of training to (heNavy marksman. The most competent rifle-man cannot consistently hit the center of thetarget unless he can analyze his perform-ance; haS a record of his performance; orhas a record of the conditions that affect hisshooting.

3902. Use of the Score Booka. Slow Fire. The following procedure

should be used for filling out and maintain-ing the score book in SLOW FIRE:

(1) Before Firing. Before firing; thedate, hour, rifle number, target number,temperature, wind (word description and

40

direction), light (word description and di-rection), windage zero, elevation used, andany other appropriate remarks to aid theshooter are entered in the spaces providedor under remarks.

(2) During Firing. A strict sequence ofrecording data during firing must be followed:

(a) If a wind is blowing, the valueis determined and set on the sights and en-tered in the score book.

(b) After firing each round the callis plotted.

(c) When the target is marked; thelocation of the hit is plotted with a numberand the call is compared to the hit.

(d) The correct sight setting de-termined from analyzing the group is thenrecorded.

(e) During a slow fire a good ruleto follow is: "SHOOT WHEN TARGET ISUPRECORD INFORMATION IN THE BOOKDURING/TIME TARGET IS DOWN."

(3) After Firing. Upon completion offiring the results should be analyzed andstudied very carefully.

b. Rapid Fire. The following procedureshould be used for filling out and maintain-ing the score book in RAPID FIRE:

(1) Before Firing. Before firing, theoter records the same information as he

dl for slow fire.(2). During Firing. In rapid fife the

sequence to be followed during firing is dif-ferent than that of slow fire:

(a) The final windage correction(if needed) is made shortly before the tar-gets appear and this is applied to the sights.While firing a mental note is made of anyshots called out of the group.

(b) The calls are plotted immedi-ately after firing. This is done by placingsmall circles for any erratic shots on thecall target.

(c) When the target is marked, allvisible hits are plotted with an "X" and 'com-pared to the calls.

(d) The correct sight s,:tting de-termined from analyzing the group is thenrecorded.

(3) After Firing. Upon com tion offiring, the results should be analyzed andstudied very carefully.

CHAPTER 4

KNOWN - DISTANCE RANGE FIRING (RIFLE)

SECTION IGENERAL

4101. Purpose'

The known-distance range is an extremelyimportant step in the building of a soundfoundation of marksmanship principles. Itwould be impossible to eliminate this phaseof marksmanship training and still expectthe training progression to produce a rifle-man with the degree of proficiency required.It is during this phase that the rifleman ac-quires the elementary skills necessary toperform well on any firing range. Afterthorough instruction in the fundamentals ofmarksmanship, the student is given the op-portunity. to apply those principles taughtduring the preparatory phase, the foundationof sound marksmanShip principles is con-structed in each Navyman. With the under-standing of marksmanship principles and thesuccessful completion of the applicationphase of those principles, the rifleman isthen ready to progress to any phase ofmarksmanship training which requires ac-curate, well-aimed fire. (See fig. 4-L)

4102. Training

.-Known-distance range firing is nothingmore than- apractical application's-of thosefundamental-skillstaught during preparatorymarksmanship. It is the opportunity for theindividual rifleman to put this; practice theintegrated act of shooting. Under the guid-ance of the instructor, the rifleman istaught to understand .the elements that effectthe hitting or missing of a target by analyzinghis own experiences in flring his rifle. Onthe known-distance range the rifleman willactually' fire at targets up to the maximumeffective range of his rifle. During thistraining he will come to appreciate the

41

-Figure 4-L-7-Correct sight alignment andtrigger control hit the mark.

Various skills that he must master to enablehim to deliver accurate fire at a target andwill be building confidence within himself.Known-distance range training will be con-ducted in accordance with current ,Navy di-rectives as outlined in chapter 8 of thismanual.

,SECTION -1.1

COURSES OF FIRE

4201. General

The types of firing courses set forth incurrent Navy directiveS are established toprovide a standardized rifle training through-out the Navy and to provide an adequatemeans of evaluating the capabilities of rifle-man. Therefore, in establishing a known-distance.range course of fire, there are cer-tain criteria that should be met to be aneffective course:


a. Distances. The rifleman should fire atseveral different ranges up to the maximumeffective range of his rifle. This is necessaryto teach the shooter the effect of wind on abullet at various ranges and that he learnhow to manipulate the rear sight in movingfrom one distance to another. It will alsoinstill "within the rifleman the confidence andknowledge that he can effectively engage atarget at great distances.

b. Positions. The course of fire shouldrequire the rifleman to utilize all four of thebasl.c positions 'taught in the preparatoryphase of marksmanship training. All combator field positions are variations of theprone, sitting, kneeling, and standing or off-hand positions.

--

c. Slow and Rapid Fire, During the con-duct of firing, the rifleman should be re-quired to fire both slow and rapid 'Tirestages. The slow fire stages allow both thecoach and the rifleman to analyze each roundto determine the reason for each hit ormiss. It is necessary to learn to deliverone wel -aimed shot since rapid fire is nothingmore than a sequence of indiyidual well -aimedshots. During rapid fire, the rifleman is

42

required to deliver an accuratWvolume of firein a specific time frame. He should also berequired to reload his rifle within the stringof fire as an additional training feature.

d. Courses. Known-distance firing shouldconsist of both familiarization and qualifica-tion tiring. Familiarization firing is practicefiring with the assistance of an instructor.Qualification firing is clone without theassi§.ance of an instructor, and is used toevaluate the rifleman's ability in applyingthe fundamentals of marksmanship. Therequirement of record firing also createsadditional pressure or !anxiety on the rifle-man which he must control to satisfactorilycomplete the course of fire.. As a generalrule, familiarization firing is completedbefore any portion of qualification firing isstarted. No pert of qualification firing shouldbe conducted on c.he same day as familiariza.-tion firing wdess scheduling difficulties re-quire it. If possible, qualification firingshould be COilipleted In one day.

4202. Procedures

Procedures for range firing are outlinedin chapter 2 of this manual.

G.

f")

CHAPTER 5

BASIC PISTOL AND REVOLVERMARKSMANSHIP TRAINING

SECTION IGENERAL

5101. Purpose

The primary purpoge of this course is toteach individuals the fundamentals of accu-..rate shooting with the Service .38 CaliberRevolver and the Service .45 Caliber Pistol,and to develop sufficient skill in their ap-plication to qualify with at least the militaryminimum of "Marksman."

5102. DiscussionShooting the handgun with accuracy ade-

quate for military purposes can be a simplytaught and easily learned physical skill com-pletely within the capabilities of the averagesailor. This preparation is the essence ofsimplicity. 'Iwo fundamentals only arestressed. Individuals should be under posi-tive command control. Only positive in-struction is used. Detailed or negative in-struction should be studiously avoided. Itsuse will have a markedly adverse effect onthe instructioa. Once this method of in-struction, with its basic exercises, is under-stood, it becomes extremely flexible and canbe adapted to produce any required level ofproficiency from familiarization to militaryexpert with a minimum expenditure of time ,

and ammunition.

5103. Fundamentals

Let us consider the necessities to get ahit with the handgumand an individual's nat-ural habits in relation to these necessities.Where does a pistol hit? Or a revolver?The answer, of course, is extremely simple.The weapon hits wherever- it is pointed whenit is discharged. So obviously, if we wish to

hit a target, we must have the weapon pointedat the target when we discharge the weapon.

In this course we will try,to teach Navy-men how to have the weapon pointed at thetarget he wished to hit when the weapon isdischarged. The requirements to do thismust be completely within the physical capa-bilities of the individual shooter. The shootercan point the weapon an ywhere he desires andif he possesses a working knowledge of thefundamentals presented herein, _lie will becapable of hitting any military target regard-

: less of shape, composition, or color withinthe normal range of the weapon..

We use the sights to line up the weaponin precisely the same maper for each shotin order to eliminate angular error. There-fore, if we can line up the sights in a consist-ent manner and are able to discharge theweapon without disturbing this sight alignmentwhile pointing the weapon at the target area,we will obviously be getting consistent hits inthis area. What are the shooters problemsin leaning these simple physical tasks oflining up the 'sights, pointing the weapon atthe target area and moving the finger to dis-charge the weapon without disturbing thesight alignment? Habit is a powerful forceand a lifetime habit working against us thatcan be a difficult thing to overcome. Fromthe crawling stage on, what does the averageperson look at when throwing a ball? Thecatcher or target? A football? The same.A slingshot? The target. In the averageperson's previous experience, his lifetimehabit pattern has been to look at any targethe has desired to hit within what may be con-.sidered normal pistol ranges. In other words,if the average shooter doesn't look at thetarget, he isn't normal. We know that theweapon will hit wherever it, is pointed whenit is discharged.

43


Good teaching practice requires that ciis-tractionsbe removed from the teaching area.If we are trying to teach an individual to lookat the sights and then place a "bull's-eye"down range for the shooter to hit, this, incombination with the shooter's habit of tar-get fixation can become a major obstacle inreaching our teaching objective. Eliminatingthe "bull's-eye" and utilizing a blank targetis mandatory in primary and basic instruc-tion,

Once again we are trying to teach the in-dividual simple actions: To look at the sightsin order to maintain consistent sight align-ment: point the weapon. at the target area;and discharge the weapon without nisturbingthe sight alignment. From this w can es-tablish the fundamentals of accurate marks-manship. By fundamental we mean a founda-tion, an essential, something we ca snotwithout. As applied to shooting-, there areonly two fundamentals Sight alignment andthe ability to discharge the weapon withoutdisturbing the sight alignment, which will bereferred to as trigger control. If we can dothese two things, we will get consistent hits,when the weapon is pointed at the target area,no matter what else we do. If we cannotapply these two fundamentals, it is immate-rial what else we do; we willnot get consist-ent hits in the target area. If these funda-mentals are accepted, we can then developthe hypothesis that in ender to attain ma,Ki-mum accuracy performance with the handguneverything we do in delivering a shot mustcontribute something positive to sight align--.lent and trigger control. This is pi obablyphysically impossible: so to get into the realmof the possible, we must analyze our actionsin relation to their affect on sight alignmentand trigger control and discaid o" cease anyactions which have the slightest Adverse ef-fect on either of the fundamentals. We arenot trying to make polished competitivemarksman in our qualification instruction.We merely wish to develop a skill level suit-able for military purposes. If we can teachthe individual to look at the sights, point theweapon at the target area, and discharge theweapon without disturbing the sight align-ment excessively, we will achieve this skilllevel. This can be readily accomplished if

44

we know what to teach and how to presentour in struction.

5104. Techniques

Requisites used to implement the funda-mentals. Variations in techniques have beenfound to be completely inconsequential as longas the primary stress is placed on the funda-mentals, sight alignment and trigger control.Do not Iet techniques take precedence in theshooter's mind over the fundamentals.

RONi SIGHT

CORRECTS!GH

ALIGNMENT

Figure 5-1.Correct sight alignment.

a. Sight Alignment. The currently ac-cepted sight alignment is used. The top ofthe front sight even with the top of the rearsight and equal light on both sides of the frontsight. An individual.=;hould be made to under-stand that, although any sight alignment canbe a correct sight alignment if it is consistentfrom shot to shot, we are going to use thisparticular sight alignment because of the easewith which alignment errors can be detectedand it will arbitrarily be referred to as the"Correct" sight alignment. Only a minimumwill be established for eye usage in the methodof looking at the sights. At least one eye open(either eye) looking at the sights when theweapon is discharged.

b. Trigger control. Trigger control is theact of discharging the weapon without dis-turbing sight alignment. This is accomplishedby gripping the weapon in the same mannereach time it is to be fired. The two-handedgrip is used in firing the Service ,38 CaliberRevolver and the Service .45 Caliber Pnrztol.

(I) To assume the two-handed grip lerthe Service .38 Caliber Revolver, the weapon

Chapter 5BASIC PISTOL AND REVOLVER MARKSMANSHIP TRAINING

Figure 5-2.Correct griprevolver.

is held firmly in the firing hand with the wri.,:t"locked" and the thumb placed against theuncooked hammer. With the thumb held inthis position, the middle and ringfinger willform the correct grip on the stock. Thelittle finger may or may not extend and curlbeneath the butt. The forefinger is positionedto contact the face of the trigger at the firstjoint. The other hand supports the weaponby having the fingers and thumb closed overthe firing hand. If the weapon can be cockedwith relative ease and without changing thegrip, the proper grip has been attained. ifthe hammer is difficult to cock, re-grip therevolver. After cocking the hammer, thethumb of the firing hand is placed along sideof the weapon without applying side pres-sure. See figure 5-2.

(2) To assume the two-handed grip forthe Service .45 Caliber Pistol it is placedfirmly into the V formed between the thumband forefinger of the firing hand, with thehand held as high as possible on the frame,the three lower fingers grasping the stockwith the middle finger contacting the hottomof the trigger guard. The forefinger is posi-tioned to contact the face of the trigger at thefirst joint. The other hand supports the pistolin the palm with fingers gripping firmly. Seefigure 5-3.

45

Figure 5-3.Correct grippistol.

5105. Basic Enercises

It is commonly accepted that the most dif-ficult pistol exercise to master is the onereferred to as sustained or rapid fire whichconsists of firing a prescribed number ofrounds within a specified time frame".; In theNavy Expert Pistol Course, this is five roundsin 15 sec. With the generally accepted meth7ods of pistol instruction, the individual isfirst schooled in the "fundamentals" withvarious others such as grip, stance, breath-ing, etc., varying with the background andexperience of the instructor. Shooting exer-cises are started with slow fire at a bull's-eye target, The shooter is usually told thatthe rapid fire exercise is very difficult tomaster and proficiency must first be gainedat the slow fire and then the timed fire beforeany attempt is made to practice the rapidfire. Tt is also common practice to tell theshooter to shoot the timed fire just like theslow fire, Only a little faster, and the rapid[ire like the timed fire, and once again alittle faster. As instructors, what have wedone to ourselves and to the shooters by us-ing these techniques? We are trying toteach the shooter three methods of triggercontrol: One [or slow fire: one for timedfire: and one for rapid fire. Unknowingly


and unintentionally, we have.-built a mentalblock in the shooter's mind- to the effect rapidfire is "tough"? If it were possible, a muchmore efficient method of instruction wouldbe one, whereby only the rapid fire 'techniquewas learned. Once maste7ed, a single round,slow fire or a single round, timed fire, couldbe fired with exactly the same technique as asingle round, rapid fire. It is not only possi-ble to start the new shooter with rapid firetechniques, 'it is extremely simple. Theshooter is directed to count out the numberof rounds for the exercise. Example: "Shoot-ers count out 10 rounds of ammunition."Single rounds are loaded on appropriate com-mand. With magazines out. Place a singleround in the chamber and close the slide byholding the pistol in the right hand, fingerout of the trigger guard, left thumb holdinghammer back, left forefinger depressingslide stop allowing slide to move into battery.With the revolver, a single round is placedin the cylinder and the cylinder closed insuch a manner that when the hammer iscocked., the single round will be rotated underthe hammer in a Bring position. Example:"With one round load." 1The shooters arethen directed to the international ready posi-tion (lower arm to 45' angle) by the com-mand, "Extend Pistol." In this position theshooter will be facing the target squarelywith feet and shoulder in the most cone=Portable and natural position. The standardcommand, "Ready on the Right, Ready on the

46

Left, Ready on the .Eiring Line" is used tohave the shooter raise the weapon to eye leveland fire one round followed by an immediaterecovery and firing one round dry fire, thenclearing the weapon without further command.The key word in tlui command is "Line."The shooter is directed to adjust his move-ments to arrive in the firing position on theword "Line." This is also the command tocommence firing one round. The require-ments of loading and cleariir- the weapon foreach round 'fired, rapidly improves the in-dividual's facility in weapon familiarizationand handling. The requirement for recoveryand delivering a second aimed shot, dry fire,lays the groundwork for building successfulrapid fire techniques iron' the first traininground fired.

COMMANDS IN SEQUENCE:"With one Round Load""Ready on the Right, Ready on theLeft, Ready on the Firing Line"(Firing commences)"Clear all weapons"After the last roundMagazines out, Slides Back,Weapons on the Bench"

5106. Application

A recommend lesson is providedin Appenlix 1.

Chapter 5-- BASIC PISTOL AND REVOLVER MARKSMANSHIP TRAINING

47

CHAPTER 6

COMBAT PISTOL TRAINING

SECTION IGENERAL

6101. Purpose

To acquaint Navymen with their assignedweapon in a simulated combat environment,

6102. Training

Although this course is useful to all Navy-men, this type of training is primarily forpilots, naval flight officers aircrewmen andsecurity guards. Pilots, naval flight officersaircrewmen and security guards sl ali begiven this training annually. Combat pistoltraining should not begin unless an individualhas attained a minimum qualification of"Marksman" or higher pistol shot in Course"A" (Cha'xer 8).

SECTION IIPRELIMINARY COMBAT

MARKSMANSHIP TRAINING

6201. General

Preliminary marksmanship training.shallconsist of basic Marksmanship, weapon in-doctrination and c:r1,!it range safety.

6202. Basic Marksmanship

Basic marksmanship training consists ofsight alignment, trigger control and gripingthe pistol, All firing shall be accomplishedwith the two-hanc grip except when standingbehind the barri,ade,

6203. Weapc;ii Indoctrination

Weapon indoctrination should bethe students for the weapon with which they

48

are armed. Items to be covered should in-clude, but not limited to, specifications,safety features', operation, malfunctions andrepairs.

6204. Combat Range Safety

The following safety regulations are inaddition to those outlined in the previouschapter.

a. Cylinders/slides may be forward ifthe weapon is holstered.

b. Know your gun and ammunition, besure they match. (i.e., .38, .38 special, .38tracer, .357 magnum, .38 flare.)

c. Know that removing the magazine doesnot unload a semiautomatic weapon.

d. Be sure of your backstop.e. Be sure of your target.f . Obey all firingline commands instantly.g. Do not handle weapons when someone

is forward of the firing line:h. Assume firing position in these steps:

ASSUME POSITION, DRAW WEAPON AIM,THEN COCK HAMMER.

i. Do not depart from an open positionfor cover until the cylinder is open. Do notdepart a covered position until the weapon isholstered and the safety strap fastened.

j. On position 10, do not cock weapon,use double action. Do not put your finger inthe trigger guard until the weapon is pointedat the target.

SECTION IIIFIRING POSITIONS

6301. General

All position firing is clone with the two-handed grip. This grip is described in theprevious chapter. Cocking of the hammer isaccomplished without removing either hand

Chapter 6COMBAT PISTOL 1TAINING

from the pistol. A very tight two-handedgrip is important.

6302. Combat Positions

a. Prone Position (Open). To assumeposition, drop down-on both knees, using onehand for support, and lower the torso to theground. The student should be directly fac-ing the target. The feet should be as closetogether as possible so as to present to theenemy the smallest frontal area as possible.When in this poSition, the weapon may bedrawn. The lowest prone position is accom-plished with the butt of the weapon restingon the ground. The next lowest position iswith the butt resting on the closed fist of theleft hand resting on the ground. (See fig.6-1.) In the prone position behind cover, thebutt of the pistol should rest on whatever isavailable. (See fig. 6-2.)

Figure 6-1.Combat pistol prone position.

b. Sitting Position (Open): To assumeposition, the student faces the target anddrops down to a sitting position. The kneesare bent so as to form a support. for theelbows to rest on. A crossed leg positionprovides a steadier foundation. (See fig.6-3.) Draw the weapon placing the elbowson the knees. The knees may be kept closetogether or spread depending on the physicalcharacteristics of the stuthnt. In the sittingposition behind cover, the student uses thebarricade for support of the weapon insteadof his knees, and places the butt of the

49

Figure 6-2.Combat pistol proneposition behind cover.

Figure 6-3.--Combat pistol sitting position.

weapon on the barricade if at all possible.The arms should be-,ektended to their fulllength. (See fig. 6-4.) Two-hanc'ed grip isused in both these positions.

c. Kneeling Position. To assume position,the student faces the target and drops to theground placing the right leg under the bodyand sitting on the foot. (See fig. 6-5.) (Theside of the foot for low position, or the heelfor high position.) In the low position whichis considered the steadiest, the left leg isplaced well forward of the body in order tosupport the left ,arm under the bicep justforward of the armpit. Draw the weapon,


Figure 6-4.Combat pistol sittingposition behind cover.

with the -right arm locked, place the butt inthe palm of the left hand. Cocking is accom-plished with the right' thumb. (NOTE: Left-handed shooters sit on opposite foot and useright knee for support.) Kneeling positionbehind cover, the student used the,.barricacleto support the butt of the weapon. The armsare extended their full length and the bodyis raised slig ,tly from the open kneelingposition. (See fig. 6-6.)

d. Standing .Position Behind a Barricade.Take the weapon in a one hand grip. Placethe foot opposite the weapon hand aga'.nst theedge of the barricade. Place the non-weaponhand against the barricade so the hand formsa V with the thumb and the forefinger. Place

....41r1:C;T:e

Figure 6- 5. Combat pistol kneeli:ig position.

e

the wrist of the gun hand in this V with the Figure 6-6.Combat pistol, kneelingweapon extending beyond the barricade. The position behind cover.weapon is cocked with the gun hand. All po-sitions stated for right hand are the samefor the left hand. However, the gun hand is e. Standing Position (Open). To assumedetermined by the position that affords the position the student faces the target andmost protection. (See figs. 6-7 and 6-8.) places his feet slightly more than shoulder

50

Chapter 6COMBAT PISTOL TRAINING

Figure 6-7.Combat pistol standing positionbehind barricadefiring from right side.

Figure 6-8.Comtat pistol standing positionbehind barricadefiring from left side.

width apart, draws the weapon pil.d leansslightly towards the target. Use-the two handgrip, cock the weapon and aim all shots inthis'position. (See fig. 6-9.)

f. Crouch Position (Open). To assumeposition the student laces the target, posi-tions his feet slightly more than shoulderwidth apart, draws the weapon, points ittoward the target, and simultaneously grasps

51

Figure 6-9.Combat pistol standing position..

it with both hands firmly. The student bringsthe weapon up to chest _height, focus eyes onthe target, not the sights, and fires the weapondouble action as rapidly as possible: Theknees should be bent slightly in this position.(See figA-10.) This is point shooting using"Quick Kill" techniques, not aimed fire.

SECTION IVKNOWN DISTANCE RANGE FIRING

6401. GeneralThe purpose of known distance range fir-

ing is to give the student a practical exercisein the use of his weapon. This instills confi-dence in the.. student with regards to hisability and accuracy of his weapon.

6402. Preliminary Firing

The purpose of the preliminary firingis to allow the student to practice sight


s

?t

Figure 6-10.Combat pistol crouch position.

alignment, sight picture and trigger contrOlwhile assuming some of the positions to beused on the combat pistol course. All firingshould be done on blank targets. Six roundsare fired, 2 shots right lucid, 2 shuts lefthand and 2 shots using the barricade forsupport. Dry firing should also be practicedbefore the student does any live firing. Sixmore rounds should then be fired, 2 shotsprone, 2 shots sitting and 2 shots kneeling.During this period, emphasis should beplaced on proper grip poFitri5n of triggerfinger, sight alignment and trigger control.(Sec fig. 6-11.)

6403. 100 Yard Range Firing

It is possible to hold off tv,,o or three in-experienced riflemen even in the open if theprone position is used and basic marksman-ship principles .re followed. The purpoSeof the 100 yard firing is to demonstrate tothe student that it is possible to get hits on a

4,

52

Figure 6-11.Sight picture,preliminary firing.

silhouette at 100 yards. This will developconfidence in himself and his weapon. Thestudent should assume the prone position(open) as described in the previous sectionand uhoulcl use the sight picture as shown infiguic 6-12. The student should be appraisedof the wind effects and the need for exactnessin sight alignment. Six rounds are fired byeach student at this range. It is imperativethat the butt of the weapon be supported inthis type of firing.

6404. Combat Pistol Course FiringSpecial Instructions

(1) Stay aft of position marker.(2) Always reload behind the barri-

cade, Upon completion of firing in an openposition, open the cylinder then arise andproceed to the next position, ejecting thebrass enroute, and reload behind the barri-cade. If firing is clone behind the barricade,reload, holster the revolver, secure thestrap over the weapon and proceed to thenext point.


Figure 6-12.Sight picture100 yard firing.

LEFT TARGET

(3) Fire on the proper target. Thetarget on the right will receive all shots (20)from the right side of the line and barricade.The left target will receive all shots (25)from left side of the hue aril barricade.'Thecenter target will receive only theme shotsfired double action from position 10 at theseven yard line.

(4) All firing will be two-handed exceptat the barricade; position 7 the right hand isused and position 8 the left hand is used.

(5) Sight Pictu e.. See figure 6 -13-(6) Scoring.

(a) Time. This is a timed course.The student will double-time between allpoints.

(7) Loading/unloading, rr.oving betweenpoints is done very rapidly. Slow down foractual aiming and firing.

(8) Each student will be given 50rounds. These rounds will be placed in thepocket most satisfactory for easy loading,(Normally right side pocket for right-handedshooters.)

9) Time permitting, a dry-firing runthrough.

b. Firing Combat Course. Student loadsfive rounds, holsters the weapon, securing

CENTER TARGET RIGHT TARGET

Figure 6-13.Sight picture. cohabat course firing.

53


the safety strap, and stands by at the °start-ing point. On command, he runs to the firstpoint. POSITION 1. He assumes the prone'position, feet together,draws the weapon andasing a two-handed grip With no support ex-cept the ground, fires five rounds at the tar-get on the right, a.f.yr which he immediatelyopens the cylinder, rises and at double-timeproceeds to the next point, ejecting emptycases as he goes. At the same time he maybe reaching for ammunition with his righthand. POSITION 2. He assumes the proneposition, loads, and comes into firing posi-tion with only his head and hands in the open.Using a two-hand grip with the butt of therevolver supported, he fires five rounds atthe left target, rolls back behind the barri-cade and reloads, holsters the weapon, se-cures the safety strap and at double-time'proceeds to the next position. Position 3;He assumes the sitting position, in the open,.draws the revolver and fires five rounds atthe target on the right. He immediatelyopens the cylinder, rises and at double-timeproceeds to the next point ejecting the emptycases with his left hand and reaching forammunition with his right hand as he goes.POSITION 4. He assumes a position behindthe barricade and reloads. He takes the sit-ting position and using a two hand grip withthe butt of the revolver supported, he firesfive rounds at the left target. He immediatelyrolls back behind the barricade, ejects theempty cases, reloads, holsters the weapon,secures the strap and proceeds,double-time,to the next position. POSITION 5. He as-sumes the kneeling position, in the open,draws the weapon, supporting his arm on hisknee, and fires five rounds at the target onthe right. He immediately opens the cylinder,rises and proceeds double -time to the nextpOsition, ejecting the empty brass with hisleft hand and reaching for his ammunitionwith his right hand as he proceeds. POSI-TION 6. He assumes a- kneeling''Po-sitionbehind the barricade, reload_ s and using atwo-hand grip with the butt of the pistol sup-pbrted, fires five rounds at the left target.Behind tile barricade he reloads, holstersthe weapon, secures the strap and proceeds

54

double-time to the next point. POSITION 7.He assumes a standing position behind theright side of the barricade. He draws theweapon with his right hand and placing hisleft hand flat against the barricade with thethumb extending outward, he places his wristin the Vee formed by his thumb and fore-finger and fires five rounds at the righttarget. Immediately the student reloads andturns to the left side of the barricade. POSI-TION 8. He assumes a standing positionbehindithe left side of the barricade, weaponin the left hand, right palm flat against bar-ricade with thumb extended outward. Heplaces his wrist in the V formed by his thumband forefinger and fires five rounds at theleft target. He immediately reloads, holstersthe weapon, securing the safety strap andproceeds double-time to the next point.(CAUTION: Accidental discharges are com-mon in left handed .,hooting,--Insup& studentkeeps muzzle low while cocking the hammer.)-POSITION 9. He stops in a crouch, faces thetarget, draws the weapon and using .a twohand grip brings the revolver to eye level,aims and fires five shots single action: Im-mediately he opens the action and proceedsdouble-time, ejecting empty rounds as hegoes behind the barricade at .the reloadingpoint. Kneeling here, he reloads, holstersthe revolver, secures the safety, strap andproceeds double-time to! the next point.POSITION 10. He stops, facing the target,ina crouch, draws the revolver and bringsit up to chest level, using a two hand grip,fires five rounds, double action at the centertarget. He unloads, holsters and securesthe strap on the revolver.: He removes thetargets and returns them to the 55 yard linefor scoring. As soon as the range is clearthe command is given for the next student totake the starting position. (CAUTION: En-sure that the student does not put his fingerin the trigger or cock the weapon as it isbeing drawn from the }roister.)

NOTE: Center ta.rg'et may be a pop-uptype actuated by the instructor when the stu-dent reaches the firing position at the 7 yardline.


LEFT

1-4-- 12 I /2.-01-4-- 12 I/2' --P-

CENTER RIGHTTARGET TARGET VTARGET

1-47 YARD POSITION 10, CROUCH, OPEN

110 YARD UNDER COVER RELOADINGPOSITION

3

START

25'

POSITION 9, STANDING, OPENPOSITION 8, STANDING, COVER

25 YARD POSITION 7, STANDING, COVER

POSITION 6, KNEELING, COVER30 YARD POSITION 5, KNEELING, OPEN

40 YARD POSITION' 4, SITTING, COVERPOSITION A, SITTING, OPEN

50 YARD POSITION 2, PRONE, COVERPOSITION I, PRONE, OPEN

55 YARD

Figure 6-14.--Layout of combat- pistol course range.

55

SMALL ARMS MARKSMANSHIP TRAINING M,,NUAL

SECTION VRANGE LAYOUT AND TARGET USE

6501. General

The Combat Pistol Course has'Ioeen de-veloped in order that it may be fired on any50 yard pistol range. There are many dif-ferent combat courses and one disadvantageto this course is that only one student mayfire at a time, however, the disadvantage isovercome in the training in that an individuallearns more by running through this courseuninterrupted and doing things on his own.

6502. Combat Pistol Course Layout

Figure 6-14 illustrates the layout. of thcourse. Barricades may be constructedfrom 2 x 4 lumber and a door, plywood orany other type of scrap lumber. Signs ateach oc.)sition indicate the number and post-Lien to be used at that position.

6503. Combat Pistol Range Constrilction

a. Thi'; course was devised to be adapt-able to any Navy 50 yard range. The exactlayout may be varied provided:

(1) Firing distances are exact.(2) Overall distance covered by student

is not varied. For example, if a stanchionis in the way of a right side tiring position,move that position either left or right andcompensate by moving the left position sothat a distance of 25 frt still exists betweenthe two points.

b. Timing. Use of the stop watch is im-portant to:

( 1) Provide competitive spirit amongstudents.

(2) Provide the student with a sense ofurgency which may be experienced in combat.

(3) Keep overall time of :..2ssion tominimum. (Without stop watch, each studentwill take 15-20 minutes vice 7-10.)

6504. Target Modification and Usagea. Procedure for modification of silhou-

ette "E" target for the Combat Pistol Course:Center Target. (See fig. 6-15.)

( 1 ) Fold target in half for centerline.

56

(MODIFICATION OF TARGET)

Figure 6-15.--Combat pistolcourse center target.

(2) Trace head and shoulder outline .1"in from border and 1" up from centerline.

(3) Cut outline 1" from border or headand 1" up from centerline.

(4) Repeat steps 2 and 3 on lower halfof targc-...

b. Procedure for modification of silhou-ette "E" paper target from the Combat PistolCourse: Right and Left Targets. See fig.6-16.

(1) Fold target in half.(2) Trace head and shoulder out!ine.(3)- Measure 2-3/4" from edge of tar-

get, on both sides.(4) Draw a d agonal line across target

from shoulder to ,shoulder. This is the cutline.

c. Procedure for manufacture of silhou-ette target for 100 yards pistol/revolverfiring. See fig. 6-17.


20"

2

MODIFICATiON OF F TARGET, KNEELING)

Figure 6-16.Combat pistol courseright and left targets,

(1) Place target "E", kneeling (FSN6920-795-1806) on aluminum or plywoodsheet 22-1/2 x 43 inches.

(2) Trace outline.(3) Scribe a 3" line outboard of trace

line.(4) Cut along trace line.

57

(MANUFACTURED FROM i?,LUMINUM ORWOOD TARGET E, KNEELING AS

TEMP'_ATE

Figure. 6-17.Combat pistol course100 yard target.

(5) Cut along scribe line.(6) Supports/legs with 1" x 1" x 36"

wooden stakes may be mounted on back ofsilhouette for support and placement.

(7) Paint appropriate color.

CHAPTER 7

CARE AND CLEANING OF WEAPONS

SECTION ICARE AND CLEANING THE

STANDARD SERVICE U.S. RIFLE.30/7.62mm CALIBER, MODEL M-1

7101. General

Maintenance includes all measures takento keep the rifle in operating condition. Thisincludes normal cleaning, inspection for de-fective parts, repair, and lubrication.

a. Cleaning Materials(1) Although bore cleaner is used pri-

marily for cleaning the bore, it can be usedon all metal parts for temporary (one day)protection from rust.

(2; Hot, soapy water or plain hot wateris a poor substitute for bore cleaner and willonly be used when bore cleaner is not avail-able.

(3) Dry cleaning solvent is used in thecleaning of rifles coated with grease, oil, orcorrosion-preventive compounds.

b. Lubricants(1) Lubricating oil, general purpose,

is used on the rifle at normal temperatures.(2) Lubricating oil, weapons (LAW),

is used for temperature below zero degreesFahrenheit.

(3) Any oil except vegetable oil, m:iybe used as an expedient under combat condi-tions when the oils prescribed in (1) and (2)above cannot be obtained. However, as soonas possible, the weapon should be cleanedand lubricated with the proper, authorizedlubricants.

(4) The proper lubricant should beapplied to all metal to metal contact sur-faces.

c. General. The rifle must be cleanedafter it has been fired because of the residueleft in the bore. This residue consists ofprimer salts, powder ashes, carbon andmetal fouling. Normally this residue coll,cts

58

moisture and thus promotes rust and corro-sion. A weapon must be ilroperly cleanedprior to lubrication. See figure 7-1.

(1) Chamber. The procedures forcleaning the chamber are as follows: Screwthe jointed cleaning rod together firmly (lessthe patch holder) and insert from the muzzleend of the bore all the way. (An authorizedsolid nonjointed rod may he used.) Flare thepatch out, then insert the patch holder withwet patches into the chamber. Push thethreaded end into the chamber until it touchesthe cleaning rod. Hold it there with one hand.With the other hand screw the rod on to thepateI7 holder, then pull the patches firmlyinto the chamber.

(2) Bore. Patches dampened with borecleaner are run through the bore severaltimes. Next the bore brush is attached tothe cleaning rod and run back and forththrough the bore one to two times. This isfollowed by more wet patches. Dry patchesare then run through the bore until a drypatch comes out clean. Finally, an oily patchis run through the bore to leave a light coatof oil inside the barrel.

(3) Gas Cylinder Plug. A small quan-tity of bore cleaner is poured in the plug andthe bore cleaning brush is inserted and ro-tated. The brush is removed and the plugis cleaned and dried with patches but notoiled.

(4) Gas Cylinder. The patch holder isinstalled on a section of the cleaning rod.Two patches are put in the holder, moistenedwith bore cleaner and swabbed through thecylinder. The interior surface of the gascylinder is moistened with the bore cleanerand not oiled.

(5) Face of the Bolt, The face of thebolt is cleaned with a patch and bore cleaner,with particular attentior'..o its inside edges.The bore cleaner is removed with drypatches and the part is oiled lightly.

Chapter 7CARE AND CLEANING- OF WEAPONS

Figure 7- 1. Cleaning the

(6) All Other PartS. A dry cloth isused to remove all dirt or sand from otherparts and exterior surfaces. A light coat ofOil is applied to the metal parts and raw lin-seed oil is rubbed into the wooden parts.Caremust be taken to prevent linseedfrom getting on metal parts.

d. After Firim:. The rifle must be thor-oughly cleaned no later 'b'an the evening ofthe day it is fired,. For three consecutivedays thereafter, evidence of fouling is checkedby running a clean patch throl.gh the boreand inspecting it. The bore should then belightly oiled.

7102. Normal Maintenance

a. The rifle should be inspected daily,when in use, for evidence of rust and generalappearance. A light coat of oil should bemaintained on all metal parts, except theinterior of the gas cylinder, and the gas plug.

b. The daly inspection should also revealany defects such as burred, worn, or cracked

59

Service rifle.

Part3. Defects should be reported to thearmorer for correction.

c. A muzzle plug should never be usedon the rifle:. It causes moisture to collect inthe bore, forming rust and creating a safetyhazard.

d. Obtaining the proper rear sight tensionis extremely , mportant, since the sight willnot hold its adjustment ii. elevation without it.During normal maintenance and prior to fir-ing, the rear sight, must be checked for cor-rect sight te.13ion. The indicatiols of im-proper sight tension:are:

(1) EleVati on knob turns with difficulty.When difficult to turn, the windage knob nutis rotated counterclockwise one click at atime with the screwdriver portion of the

tool. After each click an attemp`turn the elevation knob is made. This

process is repeated until the elevation knobcan ho turned without ex- reme difficulty..

(2) Elevation knob turns freely-withoutan audible click. When the elevation knob isextremely loose and the rear sight Aperture


will not raise, the windage knob nut,must beturned in a clockwise direction one click at atime until the aperture can be raised. It israised to its full height, then lowered twoclicks. The rifle is then grasped with thefingers around the small of the stock anddownward pressure is exerted on the aper-ture with the thumb of the same hand. If theaperture drops, sight tension must be ad-justed. This is done by turning the windageknob nut in a clockwise direction one click ata time until the aperture can no longer bepushed down by the nun-lb. If the propertension cannot be obtained, the rifle must beturned in to the unit armorer.

7103. Special Maintenance

.7 a. Before firing the rifle; the bore andthe chamber' should be cleaned and dried.

b. Before firing, rifle grease should beapplied to the moving or bearing parts. Riflegrease is not used in extremely cold tem-peratures or when the rifle is exposed toextremes of sand and dust. When tempera-tures are below freezing, the rifle must bekept free of moister: and excess oil. Mois-ture and excess oil on the working parts-cause them to operate sluggishly or fail.The rifle must be disassembled and wipedwith a clean dry cloth. If necessary, dry-cle-ning sol-nt may .be used to removFor grease. Parts that show signs of wear'may be wiped with a patch lightly ..dampenedwith lubricating oil. It is best to keep therifle as close as possible to outside temper-atures at all times to prevent the collection.of moisture which occurs when cold metalcomes in ^:)ntact with warm air.= When therifle is bi.,,Tht into a.warm 1 -)orn, it shoulc.not be cleaned until it has re Jhed roomtemperature.

c. In hot humid climates, or if exposedto salt or salt water atmosphere, the riflemust be inspected thoroughly each day formoisture and rust. It' should be kept lightlyoiled with special p-reservative lubricatingoil. - Raw linseed oil should be frequentlyapplied to an oiled finished stock to preventswelling.

d. In hot dry climates, the rifle must becleaned at least daily to remove sand and/or

60

dust from the bore and working parts. Insandy areas the rifle should be kept dry.The muzzle and receiver should be kept cov-ered during sand and dust storms. Woodenparts must be kept oiled with raw linseed oilto prevent drying. The rifle should be lightlyoiled when sand or dust conditions decrease.

SECTION IICARE AND CLEANING OF THE

MATCH CONDITIONED U.S. RIFLECALIBER .30/7.62min

7201. General

To acquire acceptable accuracy and sta-bility of match conditioned weapons, it isessential that certain compone4 parts beselected, and precisely fitted, to each otherin such a way that it becomes difficult, andfor certain parts, impossible to disassemble.This information is provided as a guide to beused in the disassembly and assembly ofthese weapons for the care, cleaning, andlubrication of them.

a. .30 Caliber and 7.62mm M-1 Rifles.The following components are not to be dis-assembled from the weapons except by thearmorers assigned to the Small Arms Train-ing Unit, Naval Training Center, San Diego,California 92133:

Gas CylinderGas Cylinder Lock.7'ront Hand Guardrear. Hand GuardStacking Ferrule

The components will, not be altered ()I.

changed in their assembly or tamperer' v,:thin any way. It. is import. at that all compo-nent parts remain as the complete assemblyand not be interc,:anged with parts of otherweapons. Proper stens in the disassemblyf the rifle for the purpose of care, cleaning-.

and lubrication are as lollows:(1) Lower the rear sight aperture to

its stop position.(2) Unlatch the trigger guard and re-

move the trigger assembly. This can be ac-complished by using a simplified tool made

Chapter 7CARE ANT-n CLEANING OF WEAPONS

from the stock end of an old cleaning rod oyforming a sharp "U" bend approximatelyone inch long.

(3) Grasp the receiver and rear sightwith one hand; the barrel and front handguard with the other hand (sights down), tapthe heel of the butt plate on some solid ob-ject, such as a table top, until the receiverand barrel assembly break free of the stock.

(4) Remove operating rod.(5) Remove bolt.(6) Remove the remainder of the re-

ceiver parts.b. Proper care, cleaning and lubrication

is essential for proper function, accuracy,and stability of the match conditioned M-1Rifle. The following guide is to be used inthe care, cleaning and lubrication of therifle:

(1) Clean bore: Each use.(2) Clean chamber: Each use.{3) Disassemble weapon, clean and

lubricate receiver components and operatingrod: Each 300 rounds. See figure 7-2.

(4) Rifle should be stowed with muzzledown and a fewdrops of bore cleaner appliedthrough the rear of the gas cylinder. hiswill loosen the carbon and prevent it fromcaking.

c. The above applies to rifles under nor-mal use, In case of inclement weather, ordusty conditions, daily complete cleaning andlubrication may be necessary.

d. A good lubricant, such as Plastilube orLubriplate, should be used moderately on thebolt lug operating recesses of the receiverand operating rod, the rod lug recess of thereceiver, the firing pin cam of the bolt, theunder side of the barrel just forward of thereceiver, and receiver bridge. A light coatof oil is sufficient for all other metal sur-faces. The bore and chamber should becleaned with a brass bristle brush and stand-ard chamber cleaning tool first with borecleaner, then wiped dry with cleaning patches,and a light coating of oil appli0d, which mustbe removed prior to firing. When possible,the trigger assembl.., should be dipped in asolvent and blown c-ut with air, use lubricantsparingly on the hammer spring, guide andplunger, hammer hooks, and sear'. In caseof inclement weather, the rear sight should

61

Figure 7- 2.- Disassembling the weaponfor cleaning.

be disassembled, dried, lightly oiled, andblown out with air.

SECTION IIICARE AND CLEANING OF THE

STANDARD SERVICE PISTOL

7301. U.S. Pistol .45 CliberModel 1911-Al

a. Disassembly proced7i'efor tine servicepistol.

(I) Check pistol for safe condition,magazine out, chamber empty.

(2) Engage lock safety. Press in onrecoil spring, guide, turn bushing clockwiseand remove recoil spring plug. Turn plugclockwise and remove from spring.

(3) Turn lock safety to the off position,push slide to the rear until slide stop isaligned with disassembly notch of the slide.Remove slide stop.

(4) Pull slide forward, removing slide,barrel shing, recoil spring and guide fromreceiver.

(5) Remove recoil spring and guide.(6) Turn bushing counterclockwise.

Rem ove barrel and bushing.(7) With a 1/8 drive pin punch, push in

on firing pin, and spring.


(8) With small screwdriver, engagepin stop notch or extractor and remove ex-tractor from slide. (This completes dis-assemble of the slide.)

(9) To disassemble the receiver com-ponents, 'Lock the hammer and remove thelock safety.

(10) Let the hammer forward (don't lethammer fall ag 'nst receiver) and push outthe main spring housing pin from left toright. Remove main spring housing., gripsafety, and sear spring.

(11) Remove hammer pin and hammer.(12) Remove sear pin, sear and dis-

connector. (This completes disassembly ofthe receiver.)

b. Cleaning and lubricating guide for theservice pistol.

(1) Clean barrel and chamber aftereach use, using bristle brush and borecleaner. Wipe dry and lightly oil with patch.Wipe off face of slide.

(2) After 300 rounds, strip slide com-ponents with the exception of the extractorand firing pin. Completely clean and relu-bricate. With cotton patch saturated in borecleaner, wipe off receiver rails and loadingramp. Wipe dry of bore cleaner and lubri-cute. Moderately oil the rail and grooves ofthe receiver and slide. Oil locking lands andgrooves of barrel and slide.

(3) After each 1000 rounds, completelystrip the receiver and slide of componentparts. Clean all parts m solvent. Blow offwith air hose, relubricate, and reassemble..

SECTION IVCARE AND CLEANING Or,' THE

MATCH CONDITIONEDSER7ICE PISTOL

7401. U.S, Pistol, .45 Cal,berModel 1911-Al (Match)

These match conditioned pistols requireapproximately seven to nine hours labor inthe modification, selection, fitting, and ad-justing- of their component parts into an ac-curate and efficient weapon for competitiveuse. Proper care, cleaning, and lubrication

62

is essential if the weapon is to retain theaccuracy and stability built into it. Improperprocedures in the disassembly and assembly

the weapon can be damaging.a. A proper bushing wrench must be used

in the removal of the bushing, which is ex-paneled to fit each particular slide.

b. For the purpose of cleaning _rideating the pistol, the bushing and barrelshould be `removed only after 1,000 roundsof use. For more frequent cleaning andlubrication, -the fall )wing alternate methodof disassembly is recommended:

(1) Remove magazine, check pistol forsafe condition.

(2) Push slide to the rear, aligningwith the slide step disassembly notch.

(3) Push out slide stop(4) Pull slide from receiver, gripping

the recoil spring and guide as the '-''.de isremoved from the receiver.

(5) Remove recoil spring and guide.The complete barrel and slide assembly

should be clipped in and scrubbed out withNavy Standard Type Solvent, and blown outwith an air hose. A moderate amount oflight oil should be applied to the inside of theslide, especially to the tongue and groovesand barrel locking lands and grooves. Donot use lubriplate or plastilubC, or any heavygrease. A lubricant, such as Rig, is recom-mended for use on the la link lug. If thisis not available, light oil is sufficient.

Apply a light coat of light oil to the bush-.ing and barrel. The receiver components,consisting of the main spring, housing, thumb'safety, grip safety, sea spring, hammer,sear, and disconnector, should be disassem-bled whenever the slide and barrel assemblyis taken clown, and the same treatment ofcleaning and lubrication applies to thesecomponents and the receiver.

c. To reassemble the slide and barrel tothe receiver, follow the procedure outlinedbelow:

(1) Compress the recoil spring in tothe recoil spring plug and stop the recoilspring guide on the barrel link, hold the re-coil spring against the barrel, and install onthe receiver. Push the slide to the rear,aligning with slide stop, and re-install slidestop pin in position.

Chapter 7CARE AND CLEANING OF WEAPONS

When removing the bushing and barrelfrom the slide, use the bushing wrench.Turn bushing arid remove spring plug. Re-move slide from receiver, then remove therecoil spring and guide. Turn bushing (toopposite side of slide), tap forward againstthe bushing with the barrel until bushing. isfree of slide.

To reassemble bushing and barrel, use asoft face hammer (plastic or leather) to tapbushing in slide. Be sure that barrel hoodis resting against the face ofthe,slide.

Whenever barrel and bushing is removedfrom the slide, remove all gum from lockinglands and grooves of barrer-and slide withsolvent and lubricate moderately.

d. Following is a cleaning and lubricatingguide:

(1) Cleat barrel, chamber, and face of/slide each 504ounds.

(2) Clean barrel chamber, and face/ofslide, lightly oil tongue and groove of slide,top of barrel and 1.Jushing each 100 rounds.

(3) Disassemble (alternate method),clean and lubricate: slide and barrel assembly,plus receiVer components each 250 rounds.

(4) Disassemble (remove' barrel andbushing), clean and lubricate all slide andreceiver components each 1,060 rounds.

In case °f d'inclement weather on d', styconditions, m re cleaning' and lubricationma,, be necessar

63

Adequate cleaning' and lubrication is es-sential to the life and accuracy of a matchconditioned pistol/

e. Special Instructions.(1) Inform'atiOn. These pistols are

equipped withia new type match target bar-rel, with zer,O fitted headspace. For properfunctioning/do not exchange or replace theextractor with a standard unmodified part.If the e ractor break-, modify a standardextract r as follows:

(a) Increase the depth of the ex-tractor groove approximately .020.

(b) Reshape the frcht of the ex-tractor hook to clean the extractor groove ofthe case (test with dummy round).

NOTE: No part of the extractor shouldtouch the case, except when extracting itfrom the chamber.

(2) The trigger stop of the alinninumtrigger may become loose and not keep itsadjustment. If this happ,.i.o, remove trigger,take out stop screw an coat threads of sorewwith varnish. Re-install, adjust, and allowvarnish to dry.

(3),y at anytime pfstpl becomes dis-abled and requires returning. to the SmallArms Training Unit for repair, it must beroturned with all parts originally issued with,.the w. upon.

CHAPTER 8

QUALIFICATION COURSES

SECTION IGENERAL

8101. General

Small arms are fundamental military,eapons and all officers and men should bereasonably proficient in their use. Theyshould avail themselves of every opportunityto improve their skill with these basicweapons. Competitive shooting shall beencouraged by all commands and supportedto the fullest extent possible.

8102. Qualification

Officers and enlisted personnel are gradin rifle and pistol according to proficiencyattained in record firings as experts, shai p-shooters,. marksmen, and 1,,:_;,:-Tricd. Jl.efigure 8.71. The unqualified graCe includesthose whc have never fired for re( ordwell as those who have fired anc: fail toqualify within the ctilicnt calendar year.Officers should have a memorandum entryp, iced in their official record upon comple-tion of record firing to incluc'.e weapon, date,course of 'fire and score. All enlisted per-sonnel who fire for record should have anentry to.that effect and the degree of c,ualifi-cation received in block 4#10 of page 4 of theS(.....vic$ Record. The qualifications desig-nated herein are not to be confused with theNational Rifle Association of America clas-sifications, since they do not have a commonbasis.

8103. Record Firing

An officer and enlisted man may ii. . forqualification but once in any calendar year.unless he fails to qualify as marksman orbetter. See figure 8-2. In that event, oneadditional record firing may be permitted.

64

AD.

Figure 8-1.Recruits being instructedin proper scoring procedures.

Figure 8-2.Instructor and recruitcheck score book.

Chapter 8QUALIFICATION COURSES

All personnel should be given thr opportunityto fire for qualification. Once a recordfiring is commenced, it must be completedthe same. day. The object of record qualifi-cation firing is two-fold: First: To afford ameasure of individual proficiency with theservice rifle and service pistol. Second:

To provide an opportunity to all Navy per-sonnel t., qualify for the marksmanship

0 ribbons. All personnel must fire under thesame rules, and precautions must be takento avoid unfairness. The use of the two-handed grip, as prescribed in chapter 5 isauthorized for all pistol firing.

65

SMALL ARMS MARKSMANSHIP 'TRAINING MANUAL

SECTION IIQUALIFICATION COURSE OF FIRE

8201. Course A, Service Pistol,and ServiceRevolver

Maximum score

Expert score

300

225

Sharpshooter score 200

Marksman score 180

Range Time Rounds Target Type of Fire

25 yds None 10 Standard American 25 yds RFand TF (FSN 6920-554-5054)

Slow

25 yds 20 sec *10 Standard American 25 yds RFand TF (FSN 6920-554-6054)

Timed

25 yds 15 sec *10 Standard American 25 yds RFand TF (FSN 6920-554-5054)

Rapid

*Time allowed is for one,5 shot magazine,Total shots record firing-30.

Note: Where adequate facilities do riot exist to fire Course A at 25 yards for expert qualifi-cation, the use of the International 50 foot pistol target at a 50 foot indoorrange is permitted.

66

Chapter 8QUALIFICATION COURSES

8202. Course B, U.S. Rifle, Caliber.30/7.62mm, MI, or U.S.,Rifle,Caliber 5.56mm, M16

Maximum score 200

Expert score 170

Sharpshooter score 18o

Marksman score 140

Range Time Rounds Tartiet; Position Sling

200 yds ,r-200 yds

200 yds

200 yds

200 yds

---.,20(ydsc

2 minutes

5 minutes

70 seconds' .,-, ,

5 minutes

70 seconds

,

10 minutes

**2

. 5

*10

e'

5 .

*10,

10

A

A

A.

A

A

A ,

Prone

,,Prcine

Pro:,e fromStanding

Sittina or0Kneeling

Sitting fromStanding

Standing

Loop

Loop

Loop

Loop

Loop

Has ty

*TwO ro4nds initially loaded foi Ml; twomagazines with 5 rounds each for M16.Total shots record-firing-40.

**Sighting shots. Do not include in otal scoie.....-

Note: Where adequate facilitie?do not exist to fire Course B at 200 yards for expert qualifi-cation, the Commanding Officer may vary or adjust this course to fit available range condi-tic, -9 (e.g., if 100 yards,. or 1000 inch is maximum range available, use appropriatetarget). Target A(FSN 6920-627-40711:

67

PART,2

ADVANCED MARKSMANSHIP TRAINING

AND COMPETITIONS

CHAPTER 9

U. S. NAVY SMALL ARMSMARKSMANSHIP PROGRAM

SECTION I will he provided in the Small Arms Marks-GENERAL manship Instructor Notebook.

9101. General

As the "sponsor" for small arms trainingunder the provisions of OPNAVINST 1500.22A(Subject: General Military Training), theChief of Naval Personnel provides supportfor small a-rms marksmanship training,throughout the Navy. Within the Bureau ofNaval Personnel, a Small Arms Marksman-ship Training Program Manager is assignedto the Education and Draining Support Branch.The program manager administers, super-vises- and coordinates the Small Arms Marks-manship Training Program to assist corn-mands'in teaching Navymen the safe handlingof small arms as well as good marksmanshipby promoting basic small arms training,competitions and hunter safety. At the coreof the Navy marksmanship training programis the Small Arms Training Unit and itsmatch-conditioning shop, located at the NavyTraining Center, San Diego, California. Itsmission covers the range of Navy marks-manship training from operating and main-taining the Small Arms Marksmanship In-structor School to establishing; and developingan integrated system, with necessary man-power facilities, and equipment, to insurecomplete and cOmprehensive development,testing, evaluation, and maintenance of matchgrade target weapons and related equipment.The Small Arms Training Unit will publishand 'disseminate to all instructor graduatesmarksmanship training instructions, and tocompetitive shooters information pertainingto marksmanship training, competition, sup-plies, equipment, ammunition, and marks-manship technical matters. This information

9102, Small Arms MarksmanshipInstructor School'.

69

The school is conducted in order to qual-ify Gunners' Mates (GM) and Aviation Ord-nancemen (AO) E-5 and above as Small ArmsMarksmanship Instructors. The course de-scribed-below is extracted 'from the FormalSchools Manual, NAVPERS 91769.

A-012-0010INSTRUCTOR-SMALL ARMSMARKSMANSHIP

Location: Small Arms Training Unit,Naval Training Center,San Diego, California 92133.

Length: 4 weeks (P)

Navy Skill. Identifier for Which Trained:

0811 GM and AO ratings only

Purpose: This course of instruction is toprovide the knowledge and skills required toperform specialized duties as an instructorin basic marksmanship with the rifle, pistol,revolver, and shotgun, including firearmssafety, mechanical training, maintenanceand minor repair of match grade smallarms, range operations, coaching techniques,qualification firing, reloading ammunitionand the preparation of necessary directive,records and reports in organizing and con-ducting small arms qualifications and com-petitions.


Prerequisites: Must be E5 or' above inthe GM and AO ratings. No security clear-ance required.

Quota Control: BUPERS (Pers-B2123)Personnel Report to: Commanding Offi-.

cer, Naval Training Center, San Diego,California 92133.

Obligated Period of Service: '24 months.

9103. NEC GM-0811 Small ArmsMarksmanship Instructor

This NEC is assigned only to personnelin Gunners' Mates (GM) and'Aviation Ord-nancemen (A0)- paygrades E75 and above.Satisfactory comPletion of- Small ArmsMarksmanship Instructor Course (A -012-0010 is mandatory prior to recommendationfor Code assignment.

The tasks of the Small.Arms Marksman=ship InstructO`r (NEC GM-0811) are to train.personnel in all phases of basic marksman-ship with the rifle, pistol, revolver, andshotgun, including' firea-rms safety and me-chanical training. The maintenance andminor repair of match grade small arms,

.range operations, team coaching,. qualifica-tion firing, and the preparation of necessarydirectives., records, and reports in organiz-ing and conducting qualification firing 'andcompetitions:are also included. The follow=ing duties of the instructor are intended asguideS;

a. Conduct training Of ordnance personneland other individuals assigned to range dutyin safe :range' procedures and local rangeregulations for the conduct of qualificationfiring exercises.

b: Assume direct or superviso:y controlof personnel assigned to range duty by beingphysically present when appropriate on thefiring range.

70

c. Carry out small arms training forwatch standers, security guards, plane crews,and seamen practical factor check-outs.

d..Increase interest and proficiency inmarksmanship by organizing and supervisingcompetition-in-arms. The local coMpetition-in-arms program may be effectively carriedout by establishing intramural rifle,, pistoland shotgun rompetitions and schedulingrecreation matches.

e. To stimulate a greater interest in andto extend the scope of regular small Arms_training, the instructor shall:

(1) Plan,, and conduct intramural corn-p'etiti.ons. based on, teams authorized in thetables prescribed in chapter.10.

(2) Organize and train teams for-tom-petitive friendly rivalry between commandsin order to-develop a strong team for sub-sequent repreentation in the annual Atlanticor-Pacific Fleet Matches.

(3) Prepare annual budget for targetsand supplies used in training and competitions.

(4) ,Provide specialized training andguidance to ordnance personnel in order toqualify' these individuals as instructors,range officials and coaches.

(5) Supervise inventory .control ovirall target equipment- and material regaledin concluding practices, and, coin' etitions.

(6) Supervise the cleaning matchgrade small arms to prevent the int rchang-ing of."close tolerance" fitted comP4nents ofa match grade weapon with a Similar weapon.

(7) Submit recommendations to theWeapons Officer if an exchange of parts isre wired and those parts require fitting ormodification in any manner in order that thiswork and major repairs may be accomplishedby the Director, Small Arms Training Unit,Naval Training Center, San Diego, California92133.

CHAPTER 10

COMPHITION-IN-ARMS

SECTION ICOMpETITION

10101. Generala. Commanding officers are, encouraged

to conduct ri'fie and pistol competitions tothe fullest extent that time, facilities andammunition allowances will permit. Theobject of such competition is to :stimulate. agreater interest in and to extend .the scopeof regular small arms training. This willdevelop individuals to reriresent the Navy in-national and international competitions.Ccimpetitions,- should be conducted in such amanner as tb promote maximum proficiencyin the use of small arms and providerecreation.

b. The officer conducting a competitionOr match will designate. the executive officer,the chief range offices and,other assistingofficials and will provide for all the rangeservices requiTed for ccaduct of the matches..The:-executive officer of %). competition willbe charged with the conduct of the matches.He will supervise the officials and the prep-aration of the records and reports and willbe in charge of range operations during thefiring of the matches. On questions of pro-dedures or interpretation of the rules, the

decision of the executive officer isexcept that a written protest 'corroboratingan oral ona made during a match will beconsidered by the officer conducting thematch, after the executive officer has com-mented on such-protest. The rules and reg-ulations governing the competitions shall be_the curre. OPNAVINST 3590.7 series)which governs the rules and regulations forthe National Matcnes, .supplemented by the -

'official rules- of the National Rifle "Associa-tion of America.

10102. Organization and Traininga. Each separate command or unit afloat

or ashore, such as ships, aircraft squadron's,naval bases, stations or shore activities,should organize and train teams authorized

the table of ,Jaragraph b ofthis section.In small ships or stations where personnelare limited, a division, squadron or basecommander may combine the personnel ofthose units for-the purpose of rifle and pistolteam organization and training.

b. The number of individuals or teamswhich may be organized and trained within acommand, unit or activity for individual orteam competitions shall be based on thecurrent personnel strength as follows:

Team authorizedin weapon class

Teams per unit oractivity strength

(officer and enlisted)Team Strength

100 500 1000to to to

Firing Alternate500 1000 2500 Meinbers Members

Caliber .22 Pistol 1 2 3 4 2

Caliber '.22 Rifle 1 2 3 6 2

. Caliber .30/7.62 Rifle 1 2 6 2Caliber .38 Revolver 1 2 a 1 2

Caliber .45 Pistol 1 2 3 4 2

71 .

SMALL ARMS MARKSMi._;SHIP TRAINING MANUAL

A team shall _comiist of the number oi per-sonnel indicated in the table andshallingludea team captain and a team coach either orboth of whosin may be firing members ofalternates. The alternates are not required-.in order' to maintain a team, but no "teammay enter a match with less than the numberof firing members indicated. Individualsshall be selected for team membership solelyon ability regardless of status as'an officeror enlisted man,

10103. Individual Training andMatch Shooting

a. Ammunition may be provided to indi-viduals in Proportion to the amounts allowedfor teams in paragraph 10102.b. if teamscannot be formed' fOr any reason.

b. All competition's normally will includeboth team and individual matches.

c. Members of teams shall be permittedand encouraged to enter individual matches.

d. PrOyisions shall be Made for thalentryin matches. of all personnel Who are qualified,but are not l. stationed where opportunity isafforded to be a team membei.

10104. Inter-Unit Competil-ions

Each COMmander, ylio- organizes andtrains teams. as authorized by paragraph10102:n-fay, within the limits )f his ammu-nition 'allowance,, conduct such training asdesired_ for'''"the purpose of selecting teammembers -and developing one team' tourePre,sent the comma..d.

10105. Local Competitions

a. Navy shooters and teams should beprovided opportunities where_ pole toenter various locp.1state,, and regional rifleand pistol matches held under the sponsor-ship of civilian c-lubs,.

b. Cornnianding officers of inilitstivities that A-evelop° rifle and pistol teamsand individual shooters,as authorized above,are encouraged to arrange :competitionswith fliendly- foreign nationals, other armedservices and reserve componentt, law en-forcement agencies, and -civilian rifle and

72

pistol clubs in the local vicinity. T1: ;sematches should, -Where possible, he heldunder the regulations promulgated by theNational Rifle Association of-America. Thiswill give all shooters a common basis forrules. Navy shooters and teams entered inmatches held under' other than Navy juris.).diction will conform to the rules and regula-tions of the host organization in regard to

conduct of matches, courses to befired; -weapons, ammunition and team com-position.

10106. Inter-Type and Inter-District Competitions

Type commanders, district commandants,or the senior officeis present when-- shipsare operating in .close proximity, may con-duct sin all arms competitionS matching teamsin each we0on class from the units afloatand/or activities ashore. It is intended thatthe teaniL in each weapon class developed bythe units in inter-unit or local competitionsproyided for in the above paragraphs-- beafford.A1 -the opportunity to compete withteams from naval commands. A commanderor commandant conducting such a competi-tion may invite commanding officers withina reasonable proximity to make team or-in-dividual entries from their respective corn-mands. Competitions between teams fromshore activities and teams from units ofdifferent types should be conducted by ar-rangement through the appropriate typecommanders or district commandants.

SECTION IIELIMINATION COMPETITIONS

10201. General

These competitions are considered to beas follows; Annual District/Type Command,Fleet and All-Navy Competitions. Shooterswill progress only to the next higher level ofcompetition if qualified. However, authority.may be granted to any individual to partici-pate in the Fleet Competition by the officerconducting the competition, provided that theindividual has previously qualified as "Navy

Chapter 10 COMPETITION -IN -ARMS

Expert" and was not afforded the opportunityto participate in the lower level competitions.The Chief of Naval Personnel will promulgate, by notice, annually, the inclusive dateswhen each of the Fleet and All-Navy Com-petitions are to be held and will designatethe host commands.

10202. District/Type CommandCompetitions

:District/Type Commands Annual Com-petition shall consist of at -least the following:

a. An individual ,rifle match fired withthe service rifle (.30 caliber/7.62mm) onceover the National Match Course (modified).(See paragraph 10207.)

b. An individual pistol match fired withthe service pistol (1911-A1.45 caliber), onceover the National Match Course. (See para-graph 10207.)

c. Team matches, with each of the aboveweapons fired over the National Matoir Cour-se.The officer 'conducting these,sompetitionswill promulgate :specific detailed instruc-tions concerning dates, weapons, ammuni-tion, etc.

10203. Fleet Competitions

The Commander-in-Chiefs of the Atlanticand Pacific Fleets shall hold annual fleetcompetitions matching individuals and teamsfrom the competitions held in accordancewith paragraph 10202.

Atlantic Fleet. Each Atlantic Fleet TypeCommand, COMONE, COMTHREE, COM-FOUR, C OM FIVE , C OMSIX, GOMNINE,C OMTEN, C OM FIFT E EN, C OMNAVDIST-WASH, CNABATRA, CNATECHTRA, CNAV-ANTRA.

Pacific. Fleet. Each Pacific Fleet TypeCommand, COMEIGHT, COMELEVEN, COM-TWELVE, COMTHIRTEEN, CoMFOUR-TE EN, C OMSE V NTEEN, C OMNAVFOR -JAPAN, COMN.AVPICL, C OMNAVMARIANAS.

a. Those c. nimands listed above shallhold elimination competitions in order tofiend a team in the Fleet competition. A typecommander afloat or ashore may hold- hiselimination competition in conjunction withthose of the appropriate naval district

commandant when adequate arrangementsare made. .

b. Firing of th,e Individual Rifle Match.The prescribed/ourSe will be fired onceover the National Match Course (modified).All four stages of a match will be completedfor all competitors before any competitorfire., the next course. Stages will be firedis sequence, beginning with _.200 yards,standing. .,

c. Rifle Excellence-in-Competition Match.The Rifle Excellence-in-Competition Matchwill be fired after completion of the indi-vidual rifle match. Only *nondi ting-uishedpersonnel will be permitted to fire. Thismatch' will not be a part of the IndividualRifle Match.

d. Firin,; of the Individual Pistol Match.The Individual Pistol Match, willbe firedafter completion of the fleet rifle matches.The record firing may be completed on thesame c.. . One relay will complete a courseof fire before the next relay, is permitted to'Ire, except on ranges where 50 and 25-yardfiring can be conducted simultaneously.Twice over the National Match Course willconstitute the Individual Pistol Match.

e. PistolExc elle n c e-in-CompetitionMatch. This match will be fired followingthe completion of the Individual Pistol Match.Only *nondistinguished personnel will beeligible to fire in this °match. This matchwill not be -a part of the Indivi,a1 PistolMatch.

f. Firing of the Fleet Mile Team Match.Each team will occupy one numbered firingpoint. In slow stages, two team competitorswill occupy the firing point and fire alter-nately, the right firing first. Stages will befired in sequence beginning ,with 200 yards,standing. ._..- _

g. Firing of t e Fleet Pistol Team Match.The Fleet Pisto Team Match will be fired

i\aafter the compile ion of the Fleet IndividualPistol Match. E ch team will be assignedtwo adjacent tar ets. In each relay, two

*Nondisting-uished is defined as those per-sonnel not having earned 30 points towardDistinguished Marksman or DistinguishedPistol Shot as outlined in chapter 12.


LP

ZAZIERMENV,

(CY.F:7711.7:17 ziassiginzazgaMaremniszimtz7.2"-"zr=E-4,g, waszing.. rF

Figure 10-1. Fleet, All Navy, Interservice- and NationalPistol ChampionADR1 Donald L, Hamilton, USNR.

74

4q7

Chapter 10-COMPE1: ION IN -ARMS

members of each team will fire the entirecourse.

h. Eligibility. In order to be eligible forteam competition 'a rifle team must have atleast two "new shooters" who are firingmen_..)ers. A pistol-team must have at leastone "new shqoter" who is a firing member.A "new shooter" is defined as an. individualwho has never before participated hi com-petition with that particular weapon at theFleet, All-Nayy or National level of compe-tition. A competitor who had previouslyparticipated with the pistol and licit the rifleis eligible to participate with the rifle as a"new shooter" and vice versa, See figure10-1.

10204. All-Navy Competition

At the conclusion of the Atlantic and Pa-cific Fleet Competition, a 10-man rifle and8-man pistol team will be selected from thetop marksman Of each fleet to repaesentCINCLANTFLT and CINCPACFLT, f theAll-Navy Team Championship. In addition,18 individual rifle and 18 individual pistolmarksman, not members of the CINCLANT-FLT and CINCPACFLT teams will. be se-lected to participate in the AllNavy compe-tition.

a. Firing of the Individual Service RifleMatch. The prescribeitcourse will be onceover the National Match CourSe (modified).All four stages of a match will be completedfor all competitors before any competitorfires the next. 'ourse. Stages will be firedin sequence, beginning with 200 yards,standing.

b. Rifle Excellences in- Competition Match.The Excellence-in-QempetitiOn Match willhe fired after the completion of the Individual,.-tifle Match. Only nondistinguished person-nel will be,permitted tO-.fii-e in this match.This match will not be 'a part of the Individ-ual Service Rifle Match.

c. Firing of the Individual Service PistolMatch. The Individual Pislol Match will be'fired after the' completif-i of the "IndividualRifle Match. The record firing xmay be.completed On the same day. One'relay Willcomplete a course of fire before the nextrelay will be permitted to fire, except on

ranges where 50- and 25-yards can be 'con-ducted simultaneously. Fit:ink twice overthe National Match will constitutetae Individual Pistol Match.

d. P s:to 1 Exce 11 e n c e-in-.CompetitionMatch. This match will be fired followingthe completion of the Individual Pistol Match.Only it-mdistinguished personnel will be per-Mitted to fire in this match. This matchwill not be a part of the Individual ServicePistol Match.

e. Firing of the All-Navy' Rifle .TeamMatch. Each team will occupy one num-bered firing point. In slow fire 'stages twoteam competitors will occupy the same fir-ing point and will fire alternately. Thecompetitor on the right will fire first. Stageswill be fired in sequence, beginning with 200yards,'standing.'

Firing of the All-Navy -Pistol TeamMatch. The All -Navy. Pistol Team Matchwill be fired after the completion of the In-dividual Pistol Match. Each team will 'be.assigned two adjacent ta: gets, in each relay,two members of each team will fire the en-tire course.

g. Individuals and team members in theAll-Navy .Conwetition__will. be permitted tocompete.-4*.:bOth.5the rifle and pistol individualmatches. _ _

h. Fi ing of the All-Navy Combat InfantryRifle Team Match. One team each from theFleet Competition will be selected to repre-sent CINCLANTFLT and CINCPACFLT inthe All-Navy Combat Infantry Rifle TeamMatch. Rules governing the firing of thismatch are covered in current OPNAVINST3590.7. (series)...

i. AdditiOnal courses of fire may be pre-scribed by. the Chief of Naval Personnel.

10205 Match Officials

75

a. Host Commander. The host com-mander has overall responsibilityporting :and conducting the .matches..be guided by instructions contained ::rein:.

b. Match Executive Officer. A riatchexe,.:utive office will be appointed by the

.,tos`t commander. Re will be guided by in-structions Contained in this manual and thoseissued by the host commander. Before a


record match begins, the match executiveofficer or his r,-presentative will annowto the assembled competitors, the numberand type of awards to be given for thematches.

C. Chief Range Of zer. A chief rangeofficer will be ointed by the host com-mander. His duties will include, but neednot be limited to, the following:

(1) Safety and discipline:(2) Training of range operating per-

sonnel.(3) Ensuring that competitor8 comply

with range and match regulations.q(4) Assigning of range. perSOnnel to:

-(a) SuPel.vise scoring(b) Verify scores and totals(c) Make- necessary changes on

score cards(d) Ensure competitors sign score

cardsd. Statistics Officer. . A statistics officer

will be appointed by the' ..,host :Commander.He will be responsible for all statisticalservices in connection with the Matches ex-cepto for the recording of scores on the

\range.6....",BifIe and Pistol Armorer:\ The Chief_:

of Naval Personnel will designate those per-sonnel to. act as armorers for the v4eet. andAll-Navy Competitions. They will he re-sponsible for maintenance and repairbf allmatch weapons.

10206. Range Personnel

Range personnel include the following:range officer, assistant range officers, 'lineblock officers, line petty officers', pit offi-cer,' pit block officers, - pit petty, officer,scorers, telephone operators,--target Oilers(on rifle ranges) target handlers (onpistol ranges).

a. Appointment of Range Personnel.Range personnel will be appointed by thehost commander. (Small arms marksman-ship instructors and Small Arms Training'Unit personnel will generally be assigned-these duties.)

(1) CommissiOned.officA or warrantofficers will be appointed as executive offi=cer and statistical offiCer.

(2) Firk class petty officers and abovewill be appoiated as chief range officer andpit officer.

(3) Other personnel'as available maybe appointed to fill all other positions:,

b. Range Officer. When more than onerange is used to conduct a match, a rangeofficer willbe appointed for each. He willbe responsible for that part of tie match.prOgram fired on his range, for safety, dis-ciplifie, performah.,e and conduct of all Per-sonnel on his range, and performing such of,the chief range officers duties as may tr.vebeen_,speCifically delegated to him.

c. Assi want Range Officer. A firstclaSs Or chief petty-Officer-may be assignedunder the direction of the range--(officer; hewill actually Controltheir2nningiorthe-rk...t..,,ngeby issuing (usually over a ptiblic addre-SSsystem) appropriate corninands and instruc-tions to all range personnel including com-petitors. Only those commands' and instruc-tions pertaining to the actual operation of the_range will° be made, except where safetyregulations are tieing or about to be violated,-ch. unless directed by the range officer.

d. Line BlOck Officers. Line block_cers will be assigned in a ratio of one foreach 25 targets to assist the range officer.(E-6 or above.)

e. Line Petty Officers: Line petty offi-cers will be assigned in a ratio of One foreach .4Q targe to assist the line block offi-cers.- (E-5 o, rBlow.)

f. Pit. Officer. A chief petty officer shouldbe assigned as pit officer and is responsiblefor Piorer pit operation, operation, safeg,iscipline, conduct and performance. of his

p t personnel.\g. -Pit Block Officer. Pit block officers

e assigned: in a ratio of one for each-tF,' tar ets toaL,sist the pit officer. (E.-6 or,:above;)

7: 7 .j1", :pit Petty Officers. Pit petty officersbe asigned in a ratio of one for '110

,::-targets to as *st pit block officers. (E-5 orbelow.)

76

i. Sa,rers. I rifles matches one scorerwill be assigned ach target in operation;fewer sco:.:ers may e-used in pistol. Scor-ers will be responsible for 'maintaining cor-rect scores of all competitors firinCirrrtheir.

.,

Chapter 10 OMPETITION-IN-ARMS

respective targets and will assist scaron adjacent targets in rapid-fire stages,directed by the range officer. When shootingis in progress, it is the primary duty of thescoreke,.per to observe his shooter, and tobe especially /at c hf ul. for\ early or lab. shotsand for malfunctions during tl.ni,-/..fire.Shooters may be used as)scorers, ii :ieces-sary,, when not in the 'Acc \)f firing or other-wise occupie-I on the firin line. ,

.j. T'elepnone Operator . Telephone op-erators will be assigned I to each telephonejack on the firing line and in ,the. pits. Oi.,-erators will pass message's only as given ordirected by range officrrs or block officialsand pit officers and p.t block officials

k. Two target pullers will be. assignedfor each target used.

1. One target handler will be assigned foreach three targets operated.

10207. Courses of Fire for the Fleetand All-Navy Matches

a. Rifle. The following course will beused in individual and.team firing.

Rifle National Match Course (Modified)

Range(yds)

'TimeLimit Shots Target .Position

,,200 20 min . 20 SR standing

200 50 sec '10 SR standingto sitting

300 60 sec lr SR standingto prone

, 'LI

\ 600 20 min 20 MR prone' (500)

. b. Pistol,. The following course will beused in individual and team firing.

Range(yds)

Pistol National Match Course

TimeLimit ` Shots Target

10 min I .10 Standard American50 yds.' Slow Fire.

77

Range(yds)

25

TimeLimit Shots Targ '3t

10* Sta'ndard ,American25 yds. RF & TF.

25 10 sec 10* Standard American25 yd.:, RF & TF.

'Time aliowA is for one 5 shot magazine,2 magazines to De fired.

10208. Aggregate Scores0

. a. Individual Service Rifle AggregateScOre consists of once over the NationalMatch Course (modified) as indicated in par-agraph 10207total points `600.

b. Rifle Excellence -in- CompetitionMatch.total points ,500 (10 shots standing).

c. Individual' Service Pistol AggregateScore consists of twice , over the National?'hatch Course. Total points 600. (See par-agraph 102')7.)

Pistol Exce Ile n c e.in-CompetitionMatch.'total points 300. . °

e. Rifle Team Match. -6 firing ih..mbers,-team captain, team Coach and tWo alternates.Course of fire7National Match Course (10shots standing).tot, points 3000.ic.V.

f. Pis' of Team °Match.-4 firing. mem-bers, Qteam team coach and twoalternates.. Course cn, fireNational Match'Course. total points 1200.

g. Individual Rifle and Pistol CombinedAggregate consist of the Individual RifleCompetition score and the Individual -PistolCompetition score.total points 1200.

h. All-Navy Combat Infantry Rifle"` TeamMatch.-6 firing members, team captain 'andteam coach and two alternates. Course offireoCombat InfantrY Team Course.,

NOTE: Ties in the iildividual rifle andpistol combined aggregate will be broken asfollows: (1) Total "X" count. (2) Score ofthe Individual Rifle ).latch..

NOTE: All other ties will be broken inaccordance with current NRA rules for the

'appropHate weapon.

$r


10209. Statistical Services

a. Statistical Officer. The statisticalofficer will be responsible for all statisticalservices in connection with the matches ex-cept the recording of scores when that isdone on the range.

b. The statistical officer will be respon-sible for providing the following services:

(1) Registering competitors-and check-ing their eligibility.

(2) Preparing a roster of competitoi 2.(3) Preparing score cards.(4) Assigning competitors arit, teams

to relays and targets.-(5) Verifying score card entries and

totals.(6) 'Maintaining a statist4s '-!,-;)ad on

the range.(7) Determining medal and award

winners.(8) Publishing and distributing official

match bulletins.c. Registration of Competitors. Regis-

tration consists of a competitor personallyfilling out the competitor's registrationcard. Registration will be required of eachcompetitor prior to his participating in themarksmanship school, practice firing, Or"amatch, as appropriate.

(1) In the event a registrant is deter-mined to be ineligible in accordance withthis directive, '..he executive- "officer will benotified.

(2) Registration for team matches willbe required one day prior to the firi.ng, of thematch. Names of firing members of teamswill be required at the statistical_ officf notlater than one hour prior to the-beginning ofthe match.

d. Preparation of Score Cards, A scorecard will be prcpared\ for each registeredcompetitor and team for each match entered,Only official s,core cards be used, -

e.tReport ../Of Rifle and Pistol Matches.(OPNAV REPORT/SYMBOL 3574-3.) Imme-diately upon completion of Fleet and All-NavyRifle and Pistol Competition, the officerconducting the competition shall submit to

', the.,Chief of NaVal Personnel (copy to CNO) aletter report for each match fired _giving thefoy5Wing information:

(1) Date and place of each match.(2) Name, unit or organization of win-

ning team and aggregate store.(3) Name, rank or rate and aggregate

scores of ehch individual medal ,,,inner inindividual matches.

(4) -List name;- unit or station of othercompeting teams, their aggregate scoresand standing in4team matches.

(5) The letter shall commeAt upon theconduct of the competition and prOvide any

'---item of of interest in regard to small armsm

,traing-and team organization.

In additiOri;:a similar appropriate reportshall be submitted to the Chief of Naval Per-sonnel describing the results of local, inter-type, interdistrict andother competitions inwhich Navy personnel or teams participate.Such report will be submitted by the officerconducting the competition, if it is a Navy-conducted match; otherWise, it will be sub,mitted by the command whose personneland /or teams participated.

78

SECTION IIIINTERSERVICE AND

NATIONAL MATCHES

10301. General

a. 7.')* U.S. Navy,and U.S. Naval Reservewill be officiall.y represented at the Inter-service Competitions and National Matcheswith a rifle and pistol team. Th U.S. NavyTeams ..are formed at the corn etiOn of the

T e U.S. NavalReserve Teams are formed frOM t:-'ose re-servists whose 'continuous performance incompeition-in-arms indicates- they are bestqualified.

h. A maxii,.-..tm of thirty-two riflemen andtwenty -eight pistolinen will be selected !orassignment to the U.S. Navy Rifle and PistolTeams. A maximum of 12 riflemen and 8pistolmen will be selected for assignment tothe U.S. Naval Reserve Rifle and PistolTeams.

c. Representation by the Navy in the In-terservic-e Competitions will be as deemedappropriate bythe_Chief of Naval.Personrel..

,

Chapter 10 COMPETITION -IN -ARMS

d. Ar officer-in-charge of the U.S, Navyand U.S: Naval Rasfrve Rifle Lnd PistolTeams for b e Interservice and NationalMatches designated by the Chief ofNaval Pe33.,wriiel. The officer-in-charge willbe responsible ',r organizing, training, andentering the teams in the InterserviCe andNational Matches..

e. Individtials who are selected as mem-bers of the 'U.S. Navy and U.S. Naval ReserveTeams will lra ordered to report to theofficer-in-charge.

SECTION IVELIGIBILITY FOR COMPETITION-

IN-ARMS PROGRAM.

10401. Eligibility

PersonnelCategories

Competitions

District/Type

Commander Fleet All-Navy

Active DutyNavalPersonnel Yes Yes (1) Yes (2)

nactive .

valReservists Yes Yes Yes (4)

FleetReservePersonnel Yes Yes Yes (4)

RetiredPersonnelUSN/USNR Yes'-(3) Yes (3) Yes (3)(4)

Notes:(1) Eligibility is based on scores-fired in

he district/type commanders elimination,A minimum qualifyiAg scorr; of "Na vy Marks-man" is required for ,,ifle and pistol.

(2) Selected by the host fleet commander.(3) Must provide nwn weapons and ammll-

nition except.ammunition issued for rifle andpistol excellence -in- ,competition matches,

79

(4) Eligible only if "Pl-Ainguishe'd Rifle-ma " or "Pistol S; A." or has credit pointstowards the appropriate distinguished badge.

(a) Naval reservists on inactive duty,Fleet Reserve and retired naval personnel:ire allowed tO fire in individual jmatches-..nly..

(b) Marine Corps and Coast Guardpersonnel are not authorized to participatein this program.

(c) Authority may ,be granted by thehost fleet con sander to naval personnelto participate in the fleet competition pro-vided the individuals have previously -,aali-fied as 2 'Distinguished Rifleman" or 'PistolShot," "Navy Expert," or have earned creditpoints .towards the distinguished badges, and

unablenable to fire in the district/type :corn-mander rifle and pistO1 confpetitions. . r...

(d) When a competitor's peifornianceindicates he is not tqualified to continue 'atany level of the competitions; he may bedeclared ineligible by the chief range offiCerand match' executive officer. A report ofindividtAJs declared ineligible will be madea part of OPNAV. Report -.5574-3 whin, issubmitted upon conclusion of the competitions.

SECTION VCOMPETITIONS DEFINED

10501. National Matches

of:(1) Small Arms -Firing SchoolPistol.(2). Small Arm's Firing SchoolRifle.(3) Lnstructor7Junior School.(4) National 13:itol and Revolver Cham -

pionshins.(5). Natinn,a1 Smallbore Rifle Chana-

pionshipS.(6) National High Power Rifle Clam-

pionshipr.(7) National Trophy Individual Pistol

Match. (See figure 10 -2:)(6)-National Trophy Individual Rifle

Match, (See figure 10-3.)(9) National ;Trophy Pistol Team Match.

(See figure 1:000'

a. The. National Matches are composed,

'

C?'

SMALL ARMS MARKSMA,,,SHIP TRAINING MANUAL

.v;

Figtire 10-2.NationalPistol Match Trophy.

(10) National Trophy Rifle Team Match.(See figu. e 10-5.)

(11) National Trophy Infantry TeamMatch. /

b. The`National Matches were establishedby Act of Congress, in 1903.- The firstmatches were held that year with par:.:cipa-tion being limited to teams from the regularservice and state National Guard .6rga.-.iza--tions. With the passage of the National DL-fense Act in 1916; _participation of civilianteams from each state was auilorized.

o. The National Matches are ccnductedwith the approval of the Secretary of the

-

80

Figure 10-3.National IndividualRifle Match Trophy.

Army under the general supervisio- of theNational Board for the Promotion ofRiflePractice.

d. The National Matches are conductedby the Match Director, sing a combinedorganization including members of the Mmy,Navy, Air Force, Marine Corps, Coast Guard,police departments. the National RiflpAssociation. Logistical support of thematches is provided by the First UnitedStates Army.

e. The Army has c,n hand service weaponsfor check-out by indi,riduals for use oilyduring the National Mpt les.. Service

Chapter 1000 TITION-IN--ARMS

Figure 10-4.r-Nati6nal Pistol TeamMatch. Trophy.

personnel normally use eapuils assigned tothat service.

f. At he National Matches it is manda-tory that the servic" ammunit',..en as providedby the Army Je used in all phases whichrequire the firing of service weapons,.

_10502. Interservice Competitions

On 18 November 1960, the four servicechiefs signed a memorandum of understand-ing regarding Interservice Snia 11 Arms

2 8

--Figure 10-5. -National Rifle Team.Match Trophy.t

Competition. The competitions are open-toall Regular and Reserve members of theU.S. Armed Fp-rces, the National Guard ofthe United States,. and Re3erve OferTraining Corps Units.

a. 'Interservice Pistol Matches. The U.S.Air Force has the', responsibility for theconduct of this competition. "TWs competi;tion consists of the individual and teamchampionships \and an Excelfence-in-Competition Matchpheld annually at a desig-.qted-Air Force base.


b. Interservice Rifle Matches. The Navyand Marine Corps annually spons-,y thiscompetition. There is an Individual aridTeam ChampionShip and an Excellence-in-Competition Match, held annually at a desig-nated. Marine Corps base.

c. Inter service International CompetitIon...The U.S. Army has the responsibility for the.conduct of these competitions. The propAmgenerally consists of individual and teamchampionships in all the recognized inter-national events. This competition isannually at a designated Army Daze.

10503. Conseil Internationale duSporf.Militare Matches (CISM)

"The Cons-11 Internationale du Sport Mil-

tare (CISM) is an 6_ ganization formed in1946 ,as the Allied Forces Sports C-unciland reorganized two years later under itspreSent 'title.

a-. Each: year CISM organized interna-tional chaMpionships'In most of the Olympicevents, including shooting Rifle. events areconducted CV.ith service rifles standard to the--host r01:Int,i'Y. International Shooting Unionrules otherwise apply. Participation islimited to members of the Armed Foi cesthe member-nations.

82

b. Selections to comprise the U.S. i Teamseach year are conducted during forrnal try-out Competi:ionS. The Chief' of Naval 'Per-sonnel will select thoSe personnel; to beentered in the tryouts based on marksman-ship ability and availability.

.10504. .International Competitions

T!,e United States is a member of the' In-tern ttional Shooting Union (ISU) which 'spon-sors competiticn4h-arms. United StatesTeams 're selected during fOrmal tryoutsopen to both service and civilian personnel.'The Chief' of Naval Personnel will selectpersonnel to enter these tryouts based uponmarksmanship ability and availability. Fund-ing will be the responsibility of the Chief ofNaval Personnel. ,

World 'Championships. Sponsored byindiVidualsinembv countries of the ISU every

, iourl years.Pan American Games. Rifle, pistol

and hotgun matches are fired as part of thePan American. Games. The games are heldever four years.

c. Olympic. Games. Shooting events .arepart ! f the program of the Olympic Games.The games are held, every four years andsponOred by the host country under theauspices of the International Olympic Com-mittee,

L.

CHAPTER 11

MATCH - CONDITIONED WEAPONSAND AMMUNITION

SEC-PIONIISSUE AND CONTROL

General

The term match-conditioned weapons ap-ply to the following special small arms:

a. Match - Conditioned SmallArms. Stand-ard Navy rifles and pistol: which have been-issued tr(.ta the Navy Supply System to theSmall Arms Training Unit, Naval TrainingCenter, San Diego.,,ealifornia, for modifica-tion, rework and refinement. See f p;ii re 11-1.

16,

Figure 11-1.Match conditioning the Servicepistol at the Small Arms Training Unit,San Diego. California.

b. Commeroial Match Grade SmallArms.'Target rifles, pistols and shotguns producedor modified by the manufacturer for compe-tition shooting.

83

11102. Source of Supply

a. Match grade small arms are issued byCommander, Naval Ordnance Systems Com-mand as approved by the Chief of NavalPersonnel in support of the Small ArmsMarksmanship Training Program. Match-conditioned small arms are available inlimited numbers and are not a standard al-lowance item. 'hey will be made availableto commands which are most actively en-gaged in small arms compeUtions. All re-quests for match-conditioned small armsshall be submitted to the Commanding Offi-cer, Naval Ammunition Depot (Code 7041),Crane Indiana 47522, via the Chief of NavalPersof..neI (Pers-C4312).,

b. Ammunition used in team training andmatches is standard service small arm am-munition which is. issued in accordanc6 withthe team h and matches ammunitiontable,p'rescribed in enclosure 4 of NAVORD-INST 8011.5 (Series).

11103. Implementation

a. The Small Arms Training Unit's match-Conditioning Section will match-condition,and repair rifles, pistols and shotguns._ Seefigure 11-2. This work will include modifi-cations as directed by the Commanding Offi-cer, Naval Ammunition Depot, C rane, Indiana .Upon completion of match-conditioning, smallarms will be shipped to the CommandingOfficer, Naval Ammunition Depot, Crane,Indiana 47522, for stock and issue to com-mands designated by the Chief of Naval Per-sonnel (Per s-C 4312). In addition, developbudgetary requirements for support of theSmall Arms Training Unit's Match ConditionSection. Support will include special tools,fixtures, equipment; supplies, small arms


Figure 11-2, -1.11atch condition rifle assemblyshopSmall Arms Training Unit, SanDiego-, California

components, parts and accessories r?quiredfor match-conditioning and -test ofsmall arms. Budgetary requireMents willbe submitted to the Chief of Naval Personnel(Pers- C4312).

b. Commands will provide only on-siteminor maintenniicu by small aims marks-manship instructors who are graduates ofthe Small Arms Marksmanship 'InstructorSchool conducted by the Small Arms Train-ing Unit. If an exchange of parts is requiredand those parts require fitting'or modifica-tion: in any manner, this work and major re-pairs will be atcomplished only by the SmallArms Training Unit's Match Condition Sec..:tion. It is emphasized that no parts or ac-cessories will be removed from match-conditioned small arms before they arereturned for repair or exchange.

_ (1) Commanding officers wig maketheir ordnance facilities available to providefor maintenance and secure stowage of.match-conditioned small arms.

(2) Establish a local management sys-tem for custody control- and issue of match-conditioned small arms.

(3) Make a periodic check at leastquarterly, to ascertain that these small armsare returned by personnel and/or team

84

captaiii:-3 when the competitive requirement'sfor which they were drawn are fulfilled. Toretain possessi.on, an individual must becontinuously engaged in small arms compe-titions.. Small arms which have been issuedto team members for temporary custodyshall be withdrawn if any team membershould foresee an inability to participate inteam training and matches, for three months'or mare.

(4) Supervise ordnance personnel innormal maintenance of these small armsto prevent the. inter-changing of "closetolerance" fitted components of a match--conditioned weapon with a similar weapon.

(5) Provide support and assistance tothe BUPERS Small Arms Marksmanship In-structor (NEC 0811); who, if assigned, is inthe-best position to evaluate requests for useof small arms.

(6) Inform the Chief of Naval Person-nel (Pers- C4312) when match-conditionedsmall arms are available for reissue. It isemphsized that match-conditioned smallarms will always be used for competitivemarksmanship. These small arms will notbe used in lieu of the standard service smallarms for familiarization and qualificationtraining.

c: The Chief of Naval Personnel (Pers-C4312) will: ,

(1) Review and forward,' all requestsfor match-conditioned small arms to theCommanding Officer, Naval Ammunition De-pot (Code 7041), Crane, Indiana 4'1522.

(2) Forward requirements for match-conditioned small arms t6 the Commander,Naval Ordnance Systems Con land, for eachfiscal year in support of the ,Small ArmsMarksmanship Training Program.

d. The Commanding Officer, Naval Am-munition Depot, Crane; Indiana will:

(1) Establish maintenance standards,modifications, and specifications for match-conditioning of small arms.

(2) Administer funds allocated formatch-conditioning and support of the SmallArms Training Unit's Match Condition Sec-tion.

(3) Is sue match-conditioned smallarms to commands as approved by the Chiefof Naval Personnel (C43,12).

Chapter 11-1VIA.TCHCO1 NDITIONE\D WEAPONS AND AMMUNITION. /

,11104. MatQh,Grade Ammtinition> \\

. .Annually the .Chief of Naval PerSpinel

domptites requirements to support the Atlan-tic Fleet CoMpetition, ',the, Pacific gleetCompetition, the All'-Navy Championship, theInter-Service' and National Matches, \a\ nd-,

tr

\.

w. "

provides the Naval'Ordnance Systems Com-mand with a, one-time annual distributionof match grade ammunition to designatedactivities with BUPERS assigned Smallarms marksmans\hiP instructors. ccord'-ingly; Match grade \small arms Am mu tion isnot stocked in the ainknunition supply s tein.

/

85

CHAPTER 12

MARKSMANSHIP TROP SEES AND AWARDS

SECTION ITrophies'

ti

12101. Fleet Trophies

The Commander-in-Chief of each Fleetwill award fleet trophies to the team makingthe hit.j.est score in the Fleet Rifle Match,_Fleet Pistol Match, Fleet Skeet, Matcli andFleet Clay Pigeon Match. The name of thewinning ship, unit, base, or station will beengraved on,the trophy as soon as pradicableafter its receipt. The trophies will be re-,tabled by the winning unit until 30 days priorto the next annual Atlantic Fleet and PacificFleet Competition' when they will-be returnedto the appropriate site of the fleet competi-tion which is announced annually in :SUPERS-NOTE KN.12102. Chielof Naval 'Personnel

Trophies

The Chief of Naval Personnel will awardAli-Navy trophies to the team making thehighest score in the All-Navy Rifle Match,All-Navy -Pistol Match, Alt-Navy Skeet Match.and All Navy Clay Pigeon Match. See figure12-1,- These 'trophies will be transferred,upon completion of the matches, to the-ap-propriate flagship or headquarters of thewinning team. The name of tlie winning fleetwill be engraved on' the All-Navy Trophy.See figure 12-2: The trophy will be retainedby the-winning flagship or headquarters until30 days prior to the next All-Navy Chain-pionhip which is announced annually inBTJPERSNOTE 3590.

12103. Chief of Naval OperationsTrop.!,y

The Chief Of Naval Operations Trophy,know,-1 as "Burke's Bonnet" will be awardedto the winning team in the Combat Rifle

86

Figure 12 1.All-Navy Rifle Team Trophy.

Team Match. See,, rare 12-3. One Atlantic9t team and one Pacific Fleet team will

compete. The engraving and retention of thistroPhy,will be the same as specified for; theAll-Navy Trophies.

Chapter -19 MARKSMANSHIP TROPHIES AND AWARDS

Figure 12-2,All-Navy Pistol Team Trophy,

12104. Secretary of the Navy Trophiep

The Chief of Naval Pel:soonel' is author-ized to pres,ent trophy rifles in the name ofthe Secretary of the Navy, to Navy and MarineCorps_personnel who are match winners inthe Fleet, All-Navy and National Matches.These trophies 1?ave been provided by theCommander, NaVal Ordnance Systems Com-mand to the Chief of Naval Personnel asannual awards.

87

SECTION IIMARKSMANSHIP AWARDS

. .

12201: '-United States 'DistinguishedInternational Shooter Badge

The hihq4 achievement in the ,,field ofcompetitive -`-fiarksmaia-sliip in the UnitedStates is denoted by d6sip,nationas UnitedStates Distinguished 'Inteisnational Shooter.This badge is awarded by the National Boardfor the promotion of Rifle Praeti'ce(NBPRP)to those shooting ifembers of United ,StatesTeam who win .a, first-place gold Medal,second-place silveri. or thi.rd2place bronzemedal in individual or team events in Inter-national Shooting Union events, Pan-Americanor Olympi'e Gaines shooting events. It isauthorized for.wear on the naVal uniform forboth officer. and enlisted personnel.

12202. U.S. Navy Distinguished .

. Marksman,/Pistol Shot Badges- a. The highest achievement in the field ofcompetitive marksmanship in the Navy isdenoted by designation as Distinguish'e'd,

. Marksman or Distinguished Pistol Shot. In.::clividuals who meet the qualifications forthese awards will be the appropriateU.S. Navy Distinguished Badge by the Chief..of Navy, Personnel. See figure 12 -4.

-b, Award of the Distinguished, Marksmanor Distinguished Pistol --Shot Badge shall Lemade on the basis of 'individual unassistedperformance in redognized individualMatches. See figure 12-5.

c, Award of the appropriate badge shallbe made when an individual .% has earned a

of 30 points for Excellence-41-CoMpetition in recognized matches.

d. To be eligible for a U.S. Navy Dis-tinguished Badge, an individual must haveearned a minimum o 10 'credit points in theFleet, All-Navy, Interservice, or NationalMatches,

12203. Excellence-in-CompetitionBadges

a. Excellence-in-Competition B a dg e s("leg") and credit points tOWard designation

SMALL ARMS MARKSMANSHIP :PRAINING MANUAL

Fi.gure 12-3.Chief of Naval Operations Trophy.

as Distinguished Marksman /Pistol Shot willbe awarded to the highest scoring -10rn of all,non-disting-nished participants in necognii&Imatches, ranked in order of Merit as.follows:

(1) To the highest scoring1/6th (pf thelOx:',)Gold Badge-10. credit points.

(2) To the next highest scoring 1/3rd(of the 10.07-Silver Badge --.8 credit-points.

(3) To the rCnaining personnel, (of the10(:'0)Bronze Badge-6 credit points. /

(4) Each non-distingthshed individualwill be authorized to compete for creditpoints in not more than 4 Excellence-in-Competition matches. with the seairr.:e rifleand 4 matches with the service pistol eachcalendar year.

88

b. Fractions of .5. and over will be re-solved to the next highest whole number when.determining the 10(7-;. Smaller fractions willbe dropped.

c. Matches recognized for award ofExcellence-in-Competition Badges and creditpoints are:

(1) Atlantic/Pacific Fleet Competi-tions (Excellence -in- Competition Rifle Matchand Excellence-in-CompWipri Pistol Match).

(2) All Navy Competitions (Excellence-in-competition Rifle Mdteli-and Ekcellerice-in,t1ompetition Pistol Match).

(3) Interservice Competitions (Excel -lence-in- Competition Rifle IVI(atch and Excel-lence-in-Competition Piste). Match).

. Chapter 1.2---MARESMANSHIP TROPHIES AND 'AWARDS

Figure 12- 4. U.S. Navy Distinguished. Ivlarksman Badge.

(4) NationalNational IV 'itches (National TrophyIndividual Rifle Matc and National TrophyIndividual /Pistol Mate ).

ci. 'Navy personnel are expected to fire inAtlantic/Pacific ,,Fleet Competitions. Per-sonnel may be permitted to fire in ArmyArea, IVIapihe Division, Air Force MajorConimand .Hatches (Excellence-in- Competi-tion Match and the Excellence-i)i-Competition Pistol Match),,

e. Credit points only will be awarded forparticipation and qualification in thesematches. Navy personnel whose entry in-Atlantic/Pacific Fleet Competition is re-stricted in any way must_ provide fife Chiefof Naval Personnel Per s- 4 ) with. a -state-ment from 'their commanchng officer, inch-eating that the individual tconcerned is au-thorized to compete in the other ServiceExcellence-in-Compbtition Match in lieu ofthe annual Fleet Competition. 'Justificationto fire in other Service Excellence-in-'Competition Matches in lieu of the FleetCompetition is considered to ,-be emergencyleave, hospitalization, attendance at serviceschools, ship deployment during the periodof Fleet Competition. or other essential mili-tary duty thatphysicallyprechides attendanceat the Fleet Competitions. All statements

89

Figure 12-5.U.S. Navy DistinguishedPistol Shot Badge,

win forwarded via the individual's com-mane:1, officer.

Personnel choice el another service majorcommand Excellence-inzCompetition Matchin lieu of the -Fleet Competition will not beaccepted as justification for competition.Naval personnel may compete in not morethan one National Board for the Promotionof Rifle Practice (NBPRP) Excellence-in-Competition Regional Match per year (onefor rifle and one for pistol) if 20 or morecredit p(\ints have not been earned in Re-gional Matches and other Servic,e. Command=,..Matches.

f. Excellence-in-Competition Badges arenot awarded to ,Navy personnel competing inmatches conducted by other services and theNBPRP. This is to encourage participationin the Fleet, All-Navy; Interservice and Na-tional Champidnships.

g. Upon 'receipt of notification of .havingqualified for credit points in a recognizedmatch by the sponsoring Service or theNBPRP, the Chief of Naval Personnel willconsider each case- on its own merit andaward or disallow credit points.

SMALL ARMS MARKSMANSHIP TRAINING MANUAL,

h, Courses. of lire, weapons and ammuni-tion for matches in ivhich credit awards areauthorized shall be in accordance with thoseprescribed in the current edition ofand --Regulations for the National Matches(OPNAVINST 3590.7).

i. Non-distinguished personnel who hold"leg" credits for distinguished awarded priorto 1 January 1963 shall be credited with 10.points for each award not to exceed 20 pyintsfor each weapon.

,i. Entry., of non - distinguished personnelinlExcellente-in-ComPetition Matches on anon-credit basis, or for practice, is notauthorized ;'

k. Non-distinguished Na'' :;, competitors inNBPRP Excellence.in-Competition Matchesat NRA Regionals must furnish the 'matchsponsor with a statement that they have notearned the maximum credit points allowed(20-credit points).

.12204. U.S.Navy Expert Rifle/PistolShot Medals

a. The highest achievement in the fieldof basic marksmanship in the Navy is thedesignation of ,..4\lavy Expert Pistol Sliot orNavy Expert Rifleman. One Expert RiflemanMedal and one Expert Pistol Shot Medal willbe awarded to each officer and enlisted manwho qualifies by firing the, standard servicerifle, pistol or revolver over one of the pre-scribed_ courses: nd attains-the-qualificationscore Prescribed A medal is not issued toan individual-Y-wh has received one for aprevious qualification. A medal is not issuedby the Navy for Marksman or sharpshooterqualification.

The- duration of qualification as ExpertRifleman or Expert Pistol Shot is two years.If an individual fires for record during thistwo year period and fails to requalify,-he willcease to wear the expert medal. An individ-ual who has successfully qualified for expertin three separate calendar years may , wearthe medal and the appropriate Navy Marks-manship Ribbon with the silver letter "E"attachment permanently and is no longer re-qpired to requalify.

90

,.,

12205, Qualification for Navy RifleMarksmanship Ribbon and Navy.Pistol Marksmanship Ribbon

a. The previously designated Navy ExpertRifleman Medal Ribbon and the Navy ExpertPistol ShotMedal Ribbon Ifae-ize.,cm redesig-nated the Navy Rifle Marskmanslisip Ribbonand the Navy Pistol Marskmanship Ribbon,respectively. The revised r gu Wens per-mit marksmen and sharpshooters to wearthe maksmanship ribbons =:,.,,rhich formerlywere only authorized for experts, The ribbonitself will identify a mait'lZi'iTrn qualification.The attachment of a bronze letter "S'' willidentify- a sharpshooter. The attachment ofa bronze letter "E'. will identify an expert.

b. In accordance with the U.S. Navy andMarine Corps Award's Manual (SECNAV-1NST l'650.1D) one Navy Rifle MarskmanshipRibbon and one Navy Pistol MarskmanshipRibbon'is authorized to be worn on the navaluniform of each officer and enlisted man whoqualifies by firing the standard service small ",arms over one of the prescribed courseslisted., herein, and attains the qualification-score prescribed for marksman, sharp-shooter or expert. .

c. All marksmanship -ribbons and metal -,,devices attached to the ribbons are purcha sedfrom the Navy Exchange. These --ribbons arepresently stocked in the Navy Exchange undertheir previous- designation of Navy ExpertRifleman 'Medal Ribbon and Navy ExpertPistol Shot Medal. Ribbon.

d. The duration of qualification as marks-man, sharpshooter or expert is two years.If an individual fires for record.duringi..thistwo year period and fails' to requalify formarksman,..sharpshooter or expert he willcease to wear the ribbon.

.12206. President's Hundred AwardThe President's Hundred Awards for rifle

and pistol are presented by the National RifleAssOciation of America to naval personnelwho placed in -a prescribed competition atthe National Matches. See figures 12-6 and12-7. These metallic brassards are auth6r-ized for wear on the naval uniform of enlistedpersonnel only.

SMALL ARMS MARKSMANSHIP .TRAINING MANUAL

170,ure 124.PreMdent's HundredAwardRifle.

91

Fig-ure 12-T.President's Hundred.AwardPistol.

CHAPTER 13

NROTC TRAINING ANDCOMPETITION- IN -ARMS

.SECTION ITRAINING

13101. General

Naval Reserve Officer Training Corps(NROTC) midshipmen's small arms trainingis conducted during Summer Cruise.

17:

SECTION IICOMPETITION-IN-ARMS,

13201. GeneralCompetition-in-arms for all NROTC Units

bOnsists of postal matches and shoulder toshoulder matches between o other NROTCUnits and colleges. Two of these competi-tions are conducted under the 'direction ofthe Chief of Naval Personnel. All Units areauthorized .22 caliber pistols and rifles forc oitru et itio n- in- arm s. .

13202. Secretary of the Navy NROTCRifle and PistoICompeti,ti.a,

a. Rules: 'Current National Rifle Association Smallbore Rifle and Pistol Rules wallgovern all firing except . where amendedherein.

-Ii.--Entries: Entries are made by return-ing the fired targets and score sheets inch-'eating student's tull--111.me and the name ofthe NROTC Unit to.the National RiflvAsso-elation. 'The NRA will determine the scoresand standings of the teams and individuals ineach match. The scores will notbe..idetertmined by the official referee,. a Navy orMarine Corp g officer, as is the practice inthe-Zociety of American Military EngineersRifle M.atch. All fired targets inu.st be mailedto the 1.11A not later than 15 March 1970. All

92

unfired targets will be mailed to the Chief ofNaval Personnel (Pers-C4312).

c. Date of :Firing: Each NROTC Unit mayselect its own date of firing duringVie pexiGcl1 Feb-15 Mar. However, once the recordfiring is star,ted, all firing for the team mustbe conVeteci within the prescribed NRA timelimits.

dr Witness 'of-,Firing: The 'firing of thetargets will be witnessed by the Navy orMarine Corps officer designated_ by the com-manding officer-as the °Metal:referee of thecompetition.

4. e. Range: Fifty feet from the firing lineto the face of the target when placed in thefir position. -

F. Toains: The teams will consist of fivehooting members.

'g. Individual Scores: The scores fired bythe team members in the team, event will beused to determine individual standings.

h. Eligibility: All duly enrolled regular,contract and NESEP,students may participatein the competition,

i. Itithorized Firearms: .

(1) Rifle -.-Any .22 caliber rim fire riflewith no restrictions on trigger pull. Thekuseof a palm rest is allowed. Metallic sightswill be psed (tube sight permitted)...

(2) PistolAny .22 caliber pistol as-prescribed in the current NRA rule book.

j. Course of Fir: .

. (1) RifleProne Position-10 shots in20 miputdS, Kneeling ;Position-10 shots in20 niufites, Standing Position-10 shots in20 thinUtes.

.

(2).PistelSlow Fire (10 shots )7.5Minutes will be allowed for each 5 shot string.Timed Fire (0 shots)-20 seconds will be. al-

Jowed for each 5 shot string. Rapid Fire (10shots),10 seconds will be alloWed for each

_,5'shot string.

Chapter 13NROTC 'TRAINI,N(; AND. COMPETITION-IN-ARMS

1 3 1.5 Marl )1' al 01 .

. ..K1004/11,4W 77' 1A40111tik7.Jiff

Figure 13-1.Naval

Each a shot string of slow, timed and rapidlire will be fired on one of the two sloth firetargets, two timed firs targets and two rapidfire, targets.

k. Awards: When the official scores andstandings of the teams and individuals in eachmatch have been determined by the NRA, theChief of Naval Personnel will provide theawards to the winners prior to the end of theirschool year.

(1) The first, second and third placeteams of both the rifle and pistol competitionwill he awarded to photo-plaque of the NROTCtrophy, and each team member will beawarded a medal, See figures 13-1 and 13 -2.

(2) The 10 highest scoring individualsof both the rifle and pistol competition willhe awarded individual medals.

1. ResultS: An official letter shovi,fring the-final results of the competition will lie

93

ROTC Rifle Trophy.

published and distributed to all NR(Txl`C Unitsby the Chief of Naval Personnel.'

13203. Society of American MilitaryEngineers Rifle Competition

a. Rules: Current "NRA Smallhore- RifleRules" will govern all firing, except:for timelimitation permitted for firing on interna-tional type targets set forth in paragraph (l:)of this program.

b. Entries: Entries are made by return-ing the fired targets and scores on the cer-tified score sheet to the Chief of Naval Per-sonnel (Pers-C4312). All fired targets mustbe mailed to the Chief of Naval Persbnnelnot later, than 16 March 1970. All unfiredtargets will also be returned, indicating thereason participation in the competition wasnot possible.


Figure P-^12,Naval ROTC Pistol Trophy,

c. Date of Firing:- Each NROTC Unit mayselect its own c1ate of firing during the period1 Feb-715 Mar. However, once the recordfiring is started, all firing for the team mustbe completed' within the prescribed timelimits. ,

el.. Witness of Firing:' The firing of thesetargets will be witnessed by an official des-ignated 'by the commanding officer as thereferee and certifying -officer of the (!bnypetition.

e. Scoring: All targets will be scored bythe official referee. Shot holes may beplugged. Hits on the wrong target -or' bull'seye will be scored in accordance with section14.7 of "NRA -Smallbore Rifle Rules."

:f. Range: Fifty feet from the firing lineto the face of the target when placed in thefiring position.

g. Teams: The teNri will consist of fiveshooting men hers. Each member must. bepursuing a course which leads to an' engi-neering degree.-

h. Individual Scores: The scores fired bythe team members, in the team events will beused to determine individual standing.

i. Eligibility. All duly enrolled regular,contract and NESEP students may participatein th9 competition.

j. Authorized Firearms,:(1) RifleAny ,22 caliber rim fire rifle

with a',trigger pullôf 1Yot less than one pound.The use of palm rest is allowed. Metallicsights will be used (tube sight. permitted).

lc. Course of, Fire:(1) ,RifleProne Position-10 shots in

20 minutes, Kneeling Position-10 shots in.20 minute;, Standing Position-10 shots in.,20 minutes.

AO-

it

Chapter 13NROTC TRAINING AND COMPETITION-IN-ARM'S

1. Awards: The SOciety will provide theawards to the winners.

(1) A rifle marksmanship trophy to shehigh team representing the Army or the Navy.

(2) A rifle marksmanship medal to each'of the five members of the high team of eachservice.

(3) A rifle marksmanship medal to thefive high marksmen of each service who arenot members' or their high service teem.

m. Results: Upon verific;)tion of thescored targetS, a report will be made by theChief of Naval Personnel to the Society by1. April.

t4

95

,APPENDIX I

THE NAVY SIMPLIFIED METHODOF PISTOL INSTRUcTION:

Title: Introduction to the Funclamen:-tals.of Pistol Shooting.To teach the 'shooter- how tohave the pistol pointed at the

60 ,min area he wishes to hitiwhen theweapon is'disCharged. ,

Materials: ,, Target backer with `Sight. Alignment sketch.

Introduction: Introduce self, Chief RangeOfficer. PreviouS Results

,15 min Expected perfornapee of cur-rent group;

Presentation: Some things we Should knowabout 'ourselves and the pistol

/15 min before we :are -a shot.1. Where' does the pistol hit?

(Establislitfirmly.).

. Individual's habit Target'fixation,Must change life-time habit,,

3. Sight alignment parallelerror Effect of shootingdowh a pipe. Angular er-

e rorEffect (fig. AI-I) ofshooting down a funnelCorrect sight alignmentAny consistent alignment.

ti- -- Arbitrarily call a partic-'ular,,alignment the "cor-

. Tee: 'alignmentEase of.,....,,

Objective:

error detection, Eye openSee brass/muzzleflash.

Presents ion: _ATrigger controlAbility-todischarge weapon 'withoutdisturbing the sight align-

, ment. s

GripFirmHow firm isfirm? Group d,ctinonstra:-tion Wrists firm, Elbow's.firm,

6. ,Stance -Ready posi tt) ncommands.

10 min RANGE z".;L *FE TY

1. Waste of time to talk:,L,ShiSoters tune "Out -=Sho oter

will he practicing at alltimes.

2. Unloaded weapons. kill -"Ididn't mean to, do it." All

(weapons considered loaded,at all times on The range,

Presentation: 3. ,,I\To such thing as accidentaldischarge "Unintentional,Discharge" Part of the pro-gram if individual practic-ing range safety.

4. Safety. lock not used onraqgeGiyes the shooterfalse sense of security.

P

Appendix ITHE ITAVY SIMPLIFIED METHOD OF PISTOL INSTRUCTION°

PERFECT- ALIGNMENT4. TOP OF FRONTSIGHT LEVEL WITH THE TOP OF REAR.EQUAL LINE OF LIGHT ON EITHERSIDE OF FRONT SIGHT' IN REARSIGHT NOTCH. PERFECT SHOT,

FRONT SIGHT LOWER THAN TOP"OFREAR, EQUAL LINE OF LIGHT ONEITHER SIDE OF .FRONT SIGHT INREAR 'SIGHT NOTCH, SHOT-TO0-LOW,

TOP OF FRONT ,SIGHT HIGHER THANTOP OF REAR, EQUAL LINE OF I IGHT

ON EITHER SIDE OF FRONT SIGHT,IN REAR SIGHT NOTCH. SH,OT TOO

.1HIGH.

TOP OF FRONT *SIGHT LEVEL WITH. REAR, TOO MUCH -LIGHT ON RIGHT

SIDE- OF FRONT SIGHT IN REARSIGHT NOTCH: SHOT TO LEFT,9 O'CLOCK," ,.

TOP OF FRONT SIGHT HIGHER THAN ,TOP OF REAR, TOO MUCH LIGHTON LEFT SIDE OF FRONT SIGHT INREAR SIGHT NOTCH, SHOT HIGH ANDRIGHT.

TOP OF FRONT SIGHT LEVEL WITHREAR,T00 MUCH LIGHT ON LEFT.,SIDE OF FRONT SIGHT IN REARSIGHT NOTCH. PISTOL "CANTED': .

SHOT LOW AND RIGHT.

TOP OF FRONT SIGHT LEVEL WITHTOP OF REAR, TOO MUCH LIGHT ONRIGHT SIDE OF FRONT SIGHT INREAR SIGHT NOTCH. PISTOL "CANTED':SHOT LOW AND LEFT,

ri

Figure AI-I.Angular Error Effect.

97

APPENDIX Ii

MARKSMAt)SHIP DICTIONARY

ABERRATION.-- Imperfection in the imageseen through an optical instrument.

ACC.URACY.Accuracy is the ability offirearm and its ammunition to fire bulletsinto sinall' groups at various ranges.

ACCURIZE.To modify, rework and re-fine a weapon in order to improve the,.char-,acteristics of the designed .function and ac-curacy capabilities. .

ACP.Automatic Colt Pistol Cartridge.ACTION.That part to which the bal'rel is

attached.. In a rifle it' is often called the re-ceiver. Shotgun or doublebarreled..alsectionshouse all the mechanism or -Working parts.The term may be further modified as sideaction, breech- action, belt - action, spap-section, etc. It is also used to indicate thedifferent forms of charging the weapon asboit-action, lever - action, pumo-aqion, etc.

ADAPTER.--An auxiliary chainlydr to firesmall cartridges in a barrel of like caliber,but having a larger chamber. AdapterS aremade to conforn'i to the dater walls of thechamber and reamed to fit the auxiliary car-tridge'.

ADJUSTABLE TRIGGE] . One that canbe. adjusted for Weight of pull.

AGGREGATE.The sum total of thescores from two or more matches. This maybe an aggregate of match stages, individualmatches, team matches, or -both, providedthe tournawnt_ program clearly. states thematche, which will compromise the aggre-gate. f

Ally,I.To point or .direct a weapon thatpropels a projectile towards an object or spot'with intent to hit it.

AIR GAUGE.A mechanical device òp-era ed air pressure used to f.recision.me sure inside am? out-side dimensions usu-allAin vio;000th of an inch. Normally usedto nieasurethe diameter of lands and groovesof barrel.

AIR GUN.A weapon which utilizes air topropel the projectile.,

AIR RESISTP.NCE.See Ballistic Coeffi-cient.

AIR SPACE.Space-within the cartridgesnot occupied-by bullet, prither composition,or powder.

ALIBI.k slang term used in competitionto cie'fine an allowable refire.

ALINEMENT. See Sight--14.1ignmentALLOY.A metal composeci\QL two (2) or

more .Metals and/or other ingredients mixedtogether while molten.

ALTERNATE.An extra member of acompetitive team, whose utilization is pre-scribed by match conditions.

ANEMOMETER.Instrument which meas-ures wind velocitty.

ANGLE OF E Anglp-mfiti7e-bythe line of sight,ncl-tne,axis OTithe bore be-fore firing./-`1ANNEAt .To heat-treat meth1 t6 reduce

its brittleness.ANNODIZE.To_subject a met, 1 to elec-

trolytic action as th z,. anode of a cell in orderto coat it with a prat:m.6e film O't coldr.----ANSIfULTZ.A German company thatproduce:; standard and free rifles.

ANVIL.A section of the primer againstwhich the center of the primer cup is4orced

.by the firing pin, thereby'cansing a crushingaction which ignites the primer composition.See Prirner.

APERTURE SIGHT.. A front or rear sight_(primarily for a 'iflOwith a circular openingin the center. Interchangeable discs withholes of yarying diameters may be insertedto control-the sight picture in accordance withshooting condi ion's.

ARCHED HOUSING.Referring to themainspring housing of the .45 Colt pisebl, ahousing with the rear portion curved orhumped where it contacts the palm of the hand.

Appendix IIMARKSMANSHIP DicTIONARY

ARMORY.A place where 'arms and instruments of war are deposited; _usl.ally adesignated space aboari Shin, a large build-ing including'alsoza drill hall, offices, etc.

ARMQR-PIERCING. A projectile de=signed for use against aircraft and vehicles.Normally has a hardened steel alloy core.-

ARMS.A term used to describe haric,shoulder and light automatic weapons..

7--ARSENAL.An establishment, not usu-. ally public, for the manufacture, repair.storage, or issue of arms and all military

ents, whether .for land or naval,serv-ice.

ARTIFICIAL SUPPORT.A competitiveterm describing any supporting surface notspecifically authorized for a shooting position.

ASSEMBLY number of collated__ partsassembled as a -Sintle unit; bolt as-sembly.

ASSEMBLY LINE...iThe area to the rearof the firing line where competitors assemble..prior to their relay being called to the readyline and the firing line.

AUTOLOADING. Arms in which the folT eof the explosion of eactishcps used to ;unlockthe mechanism; extract.-7:i0ici eject the empty,shell, aiicl to reload 15y; stripping and feeclinganother' cartridgfrom the magazine into thechamber. The ,trigger must be presSed foreeach successive %shot.

AUTOMATIC. --Arms in which the forceof the explosiOn Of the first shot is used tocontinue the operation of unlockingf.extrac-tion, ejection, reloading, locking and firingcontinuou sly, as rang as thCammunition lastsin the'magazine, belt or strip, aria thOpres-sure on the trigger is continued. This-name1s commonly applied (erroneously) to auto-loading repeating hand firearms.

AUXTLIARY BARREL CHAMBER.Sameas Adapter.

AUXILIARY TUBE. See Insert Barrel.AVERAGE. The a v,e r a A 1 performancemg of an individual in his ability to score

Nviti. a particular type of 'weapon, determinedafte' firing a definite number of preestab-lishel rounds of matches. This figre is

fly figured on apercentile basis and isused in establishing a classification. (SeeClassification in NRA Rule Books.)

A29. III! 0

AWARD.Prize given to winning: shootersor tea in s. For example, money, merchandise)certificates, weapons, etc.

BACKING TARGE1S,A. blank targetplaced to the near of the scoring targets, toassist in identifying number of rounds firedand 'crOSSares-in-prectsior...shooting.'

.BACKLASH. Play or-Rovement in connetted parts caused by loose less` 1: Con-tinued rearward movement of the triggerafter release of the hammer. 2. Sight ad-justment screw Anation withoir correspond-ing movement of the sight itself.

BACK STP,A1:).--,-The rear extension of apistol or revolver frame which curves-doWn--ward Getween the grips.

13,..,CKSTOP.A mound of earth, hilt; orany other barrier, which will safely deflect,stop or abs?rb bullets.

B.A.R.Abbreviation fox,..Browning Auto- .matic Rifle, a gas-opentred military weapon --invented by John M. Browning (1885-192E);

BAFFLES.A structure of wood or other-)materials, used on the firing range, tofleet and/or absorb stray or ricochet bulle

BALL AMMUNITION.Small arms car'`tridges 'with a

forpurpose, solid core

"bu et intended kr use against persoel andmat ;targets not otherwise requiringarmor piei-cing, or other special ammunition.

BALLISTIC COE FFICIE 1\11 .Referred toas thc value' of C. Measures ability of a prie-jecrrier to overcome air, resistance; variJes

'difectlyias to weight and indirectly as to formfor any given bullet diameter. Thus; thegreaterithe value of C, the greater the abilityof a bullet to combat air resistance. Value OfC may be increased by either or both of !twomethot1s; increasing bullet weight andproving its shape, C equals sectional dertsitydivided by-coefficient of form.

BALLISTICS.--The science of moving pro-jectiles. Composed of three divisions; inter-

,

nal, external, and terminal.BALL POWDER.A . military gunpOwder

which takes the form of uniform balls ofpowder instead of lbose grains. Ii,e:telopedduring World War II by Western Cartridge.Company.

BANDOLEER.A beltlike 'cloth, o.t othermaterial, with compartments. designed for

99 ,

SMALL ARMS` MARKSMANSHIP TRAINING MANUAL

carrying ammunition, worn suspended overone shoulder, across the chest, and underthe arm. , .

BANK OF TARGETS.A group of targetsoperating together on the same firing lined

BARREL.Metal tub.c.containing thychamber and bore of a firearm.

BARREL BAND.Binds barrel and fore-arm together, holding the barrel in the fore-arm grooVe. An adjustable barrel band is/means of varying the .tension between the twoparts, accomplished by rotating a screw'which pasSes through the forearm a-.1d into abolt attachedto the band.

BARREL FITTING.The joining of an ac-tion With a bored and. chambered barrel, clonein such manner as to leave the correct amountof headspace between chamber and bolt face.

BARREL LUG.Aprolection integral withthe barrel used to secure the ,Magazine , fore -arm, or. some moveable pai',Vto the barrel.

BARREL WHIP.Movement of the barrel'during the process of firing. These move.-merits are transfnitted to the barrel by theforces of the prOpelling gas, and the kineticenergy developed by the projectile.

BASE,Rear end of projectile-o?'-bullet;surface at which the boat tail (if any) ter-minates: Also the rear .end (head) of a car-tridge or shell.

BASE WAD. Compressed paper fillerwhich keeps: the powder in position ead ofthe flashing end of the shotgun shell rimer.See Cup' Wad.

BATTERY CUP.A. primer housi g sectin shotshell reloading.

BATTLE. SIGHTS.Kpredeterminedsetting that, carried on a weapon, wiltable the firer to engage targets effectivebattle ranges when conditions do not permitexac.tsight settings.

BB.See Caps.BEAD.A small knob of metal On a fire-

arm near the muzzle used for a front sightin aiming.

- BEARING SURFACE.The portion of abullet's circumference which contacts thebore- and -receives the rifling impression.

BEAVERTAIII:=A-Jorearm for rifle orshotgun made wider, and -usually flatter onthe underside, than standard; its width ex-ceeds its depth. Semibeavertail, is a cross

g, t.

at

:

100

between a normal forearm and full beaver-tail. .

BEDDING.An epoxy resin (glass) usedto insure better fit 'between the rifle barreland action to the wood in the gunstock. Alsoused to strengthen the recoil mortisein thegunstock.

BELTED. CARTRIDGE .One with a nar-row band which circumscribes the base, justahead of the cannelure, to govern head-space.

BENCH REST.A specially constructedshooting bench at which the shooter sits tosupport his elbows and the gun barrel. Benchrest shooting is concerned with.firing assmall. groups as possible. at a target overmeasure distances and with any type of rifleand cartridge best adapted to superaccuateperformance.

BENCH REST SHOOTING, - -(a) Shootingfrom a bench rest (See Bench Rest). (b) Atype of sport or competition shooting, wheren attempt is made to fire a number of shots

into the smallest possible group. The ulti-mat-6" aim being to have all shots of one group,in one bullet hole. There are practically norestrictions as to weapon caliber, design,shape, size, weight, etc: The goals of organ-ized bench rest shooters,,a.re the developmentand encourageinent of extreme accuracy inrifles; --ammOition, equipment, and shootOtgmethods.

BEND.-1The drop below the line of .sightat the coin} and heel of a shotgun or ,riflebutt-stock. This term is largely used by theBritish rife and shotgun makers.

BEBDAN PRIMER.Anvil is integral'withthe case. Developed about 1-870 by Col. Berdanof U. S. 09.1nance Dept.; not currently preva-lent in the U. S. though popular in foreign.countries. See Boxer Type Primer.

BIATHOLON.An event combining a.cross-country race on skis and firing a rifleat various distances. This event was includedin the 1960 Olympic Winter Games,

BIG BORE.Generally anything largerthan .25 caliber as applied tc. Jles; specifi-cally, .30 caliber target shOoting. Also ap-plied to 1C and 12 gauge shotguns. See .SmallBore.

BINOCULAR VISION.Sighting with botheyes open.

-:)

Appendix IIMARKSMANSHIP DICTIONARY

BIPOD.A two-legged stand or -mount;i.e., a stand for spotting scope; -4nount formortar or-automatic weapon.:--BIRD.--A claygrget used slieet or trapshooting. Dead bird is one ruled by the ref-eree as having been hit, Lost bird is a miss,designated by the referee as lost. No bird isone at which tlie contestant does not shoot(such as a target which emerges from thetrap broken) because under the rules he isentitled to another bird.

BLACK POWDER.The forerunner ofsmokeless powder; -a mechanical mixture-ofcharcoal, saltpeter mid sulphui,;1

.BLACKEN SIGHTS.To apply Soot or anyblack substance to sights in order to, elimi-nate glare. Common method is to use a car-bide. 'lamp allowing flame to deposit carbonon front and rear sights. .

BLACICENG.Carbon or paint used onsights to eliminate glare.

BLADE SIGHT,A metal blade,.. attachedto the upper side of the barrel near thezle.

BLANK CARTRIDGE . -A cartridge having,idplace of a projectile, a paper cup or wad-ding in the -mouth of the case.

BLOCK OFFICER..---(See Range Officers.)BLOWBACK.(a) Escape, to the and

under p-r6ssure; of gaSes formed.,during,thefiring of the gun. Blowback _may be causedby a defective breech mechanism, a rupturedcartridge case or a faulty priMer..-(b)' Type-of-weapon. operation in which the force of ex-panding. gases acting to the rear against theface of the bolt furriTh.a.11 the energy re-quired to initiate the complete cycle of op-eration of the gun. A weapon which employsthis method of operation is characterized bythe absence of any breech lock or bolt lockmechanism.

BLOW FORWARD.A type of automaticaction in which the 'barrel is blown forwardand then returns against the standing breechby spring pull, reloading and cocking takingplace during the return movement:

BLOW .PATTERN.Unequal distributionof .shot from a iired shell resulting in large.open spaces in the general pattern, or withthe center quire sparse in comparison withthe rim,

101

BLO.WN.PRIIVMR.Primer that has rup-tured or unseated itself in the cartridge.May be due to excessive pressure, defectivepriiner, improper firing pir length, or brasscase improperly annealed (soft- brass).

BLUING.Rusting metal by artificial oxi-dation to form a protective coating.

BOAT-TAIL. --The_ tapered rear end 'of abullet designed to increase ballistic effi-ciency at lorig range.

BOBBER.A bobbing target, usually abody silhouette, exposed to view unexpectedlyand for a short time by, remote control,

BOIL.--7The appearance of an upward',boiling,-like motion of mirage, when not af-fected.by wind shift.

BOLT. sliding mechanism thatclosesthe 4eech in some types of small arms. Itusually contains the extractor and firing pin,and supports the base of 'the cartridge case.

BOLT ACTION,A rifle, and shotgunmechanism whereby the breech' s opened andclosed by a manually ;:operated bolt whichtravels back and forth in the receiver on adirect line with chamberimd barrel. 1. Turn-ing boltlocking Jugs are turned, to lock-1\-1eaction. 2. Straight pulllocking lugs actuatedby bolt siiti ts which slide in grooves cut intothe bolt cylinder.

BOLT FAC.That portion of the bolt thatengages and supports they lead of the car-.tridgv. ' --

BOLT HANDLE. A projection from thebolt sleeve or body by which the bolt is man-ually manipulated,

BOLT_HEAD, The rear portion of the boltwhich in. bolt action guns, projects beyond the-boll sleeve Wtien the bolt is closed,

BOLT SLEEVE,A metal tube Containingthe bolt and to_which the bolt handle is af-fixed; or, in some bolt action rifles, a partthreaded into the rear of the bolt to guide thestriker and retain the mainspring.

BOLT STOP.A pin or lever which pre-vents removal of the bolt from the action un-less expressly desired.

BONE SUPPORT.The position the firerassumes that allows him to use his bones tosupport the weight of the weapon and use hismuscles. principally to hold his bones in, theirsupporting position, ,ThiArneans that he can


keep- his muscles relaxed and avoid thetremors that develop from strain and ten-siorK

BOE.(a) The interior of- the barrel. .

through which the charge ,or bullet passes.(b).The diameter measured from land to land.

BORE SIGHTING.Zeroing fnetallic orscope' sights by sighting the target through-out the bore.

BOTTLE NECK.--A cartridge case whoseneck diameter is smaller than its base,

BOX MAGAZINE .--A box-like mAal con-Lanier for holdingwartridges that are fed intothe chamber by the action of the gun afterthe magazine. is inserted into the magazinetiv 411; extracted manually, usually by a re-lease catch. Strictly speaking, not a clip.

BOXER PRIMER.A center primer fa-vored- in the United States. It is' a coin-plc4ely self-contain6d -unit whose anvil is asmall metal cone inside the primer cup.

BRASS . -E mpty ;cartridge. cases.BREATH CONTROL. To exercise proper

control of the breath during' the aiming andfiring process, in such a manner as to mini-mize. disturbance of sight alinement and sightpicture.L BREECH.-2-The rear ,; id of the barrel into.;

which the cartridge is in. erted.BREECHI:OCK.A ivetal block, against

,Which/de cartridge reF's, closing the rear61\ the bore against the discharge. Alsocalled breech bolt.

BRENNEKE SLUG.The origimq.Ge?nrnrifled shotgun slug.

BRIDGE.Metal arch connecting 'both.icies of receiver.,',7> BRIDGE MOUNT.A variation of the tele-

;

.-Copic top mount designed to spanthe loading./liort of bolt action rifles. , ri;7

I-T. BROACHING.A method of rifling the'iirb21::es 'of a barrel simultaneously with a

tbol with a series of..cutting teeth.BROKEN TARGET. -In clay target shoot -

fn a bird which the referee rules, hits beenbroken and thus scored in fai7or of theconteStf.mt..A chipped target (one with a per-ceptible 1lIece knocked off) is scored as abroken target. Dusted target is a miss thatwaS)struck by the Shot, as evidenced by thedu-S1 arising behind it, but not broken. A"powdered tang t has been decisively broken

102

into sthall pieces. High target is dnethat ishigher than the regulation trajectory in claytarget shooting. Low target is loWer thanregulation. An illegal target is one outsideof the area firescribed by the rules. Regula-tion target is used specifically in trap-shooting to mean 16 yard targets, but in gen-èral refers to a 'target within the prescribedlimits of trap and skeet rules.;

BUCKSHOT.Large size lead shotfor usein shotgun shells. Commercially mzumfas-turedinfive sizes with the following designa-tions and diameters: No. 00 (.33"); No. 0(;32"); No. 1 (.'30"); No. 3 (.25 "); No. 4(.241., BUFFER .A part which absorbs shock or

recoil.BULL GUN.Target rifle equipped with

an extremely heavy barrel..BULL PUP. A shortened rifle with barrel

and action of normal length but restocked insuch a manner that its metal par extendalmost to the end of the stock, or a eductioniii length approximately equal to th distancebetween trigger guard and butt plate. J. R.Buhmiller of Eureka, Montana, claims to havemade the first )ne in 1937 "fOr personal useas a 1,000 yard WiliOdon match gun."

B LILLE T .-Small arms ojectile normallyfired from, :a riflecLbitrrel. )

BULLET. BASE.Rearmost end of thebullet.

BULLET DROP.The vertical drop of a'bullet due to gravity.

;BULLET GAUGE.Gauges normally usedto "tirieasu re the diameter' and concentricity. ofa bullet.

BULLET MOLD.A form in which bulletsare cast by pouring molten lead or alloy i toit through a sprue hold in the top. The molditself is made of two matched halves of steelcutto bullet diameter and shape by a cherryand held together by Spparating the two halves.

BULLET PROFILg .Shake of bullet from.,base to no 9e.

.BULLET,PULLER.Del vice used to re-move bullet (4-ii :n cartridge case.

BULLET RACE.The visible path of abullet passing through the atmosphere whichcan be best seen through properly adjustedoptical aids. .

BULL'S-EYE.(a) The center of a target;also a shot which bits it; hence, any successful

Appendix IILMARKSMANSRIP DICTIONARY

hit. (b) The blackened area. of a target. (c)A trade; name for a commercially manufac-tured pistol powder.

BUSHING.A metal lining. To btfsh is tofurnish with a 'metal lining.

BUTT,The shoulder end of a gunstock;the bottom of a revolver or pistol grip.Loosely used to indicate the complete buttstock of-a rifle and shotgun, or the grip of ahandgun.

BUTT PLATE. -1 plastic, or rubbercovering for the rear edge of a gunStock;usually corrugated to previent slipping fronithe shoulder. On free rifles","butt plates areusually adjustable for vertical movement andmay have extension prongs vhich fit underand/o.r over the shoulder.

BUTTS.The entire individual target endof a rifle range.

BUTT STOCK.The non-metallicijportionof a shoulder arms extending backwards fromthe receiver.

BROWNING (OXIDATION).--An oxidationproduced and retained oh the surface of gun-barrels by means of acid to prevent furtheroxidation or :.:ust:

CALIBER.Bore diameter of a rifle orhandgun measured from one land to the op-posite land, or the diameter before rifling;designated in 'fractions of an inch or milli-meters, although a stated caliber may not bean exact figure.,,Btack powder calibers, suchas .45-70-405, =mean .45" diameter, 70 theweight of the powder charge, and 405 theweight of the bullet in grains; °many of theseold designations wgre incorporated into11-lectern smokeless poWder nomenclature, otAthe sec,ond figure is meaningless. Designa-tions's-itch as .250-3000 refer to caliber andmuzzle velocity; 8 mm. x 56 refer to caliherand case length (in millimeters).

CALL.The ability of the shooter to de-termine the approximate hcation of his hiton the target through noting the position ofthe sights at the instant of firing.

CAM.A rotating or sliding projectionwhich either imparts or receives a desiredmotion to, or from, a counteracting pari,such as a roller, pin,, etc. Thus, a cammiligaction.

.CANNELURE.--A groove in a' bullet forcontaining a lubl'icant or into which the car-tridge case is crimped; a groove in a car-tridge case providing a purchase for the ex-tractor.

CANT.Tilt of a barrel to the right or leftwhile sighting; failure to hold the sights ex-actly vertical on the target. Effect of cant:bullet strikes to right of point Of aim- if barrelis tilted to the left, and vice versa.

CAPS.Lowest powered .22 caliber rimfire ammunition. Two types: BB for BulletBreech; CB for Conical Bullet. Developedabout 1850, the first .22 rim fire cartridgesand the earliest Aingricar, cartridge to con-tain its own primer.

CARBIDE.A chemical whose reactionwhen mixed with water, produces an acetylenegas.

CARBIDE LAMP. A miners-type lampwifose flame is used to put soot (carbon) de-posits on sighting, equipment for pUrposes ofreducing glare.

CARBINE .A sporting or military riflethat has 'a shorter barrel (22" or less) andconsequently is lighter in weight than theaverage weapon.

CARRIERBLOCK.That part of a weaponwhich lifts ti round from the magazine andlines it tip with the chamber. Usually foundin pump and automatic shotguns, and somestyles of rifles.

CARTRIDGE. A complete round of am -.munition containing bullet, powder, case andprimer.

CARTRIDGE CASE. Usually a brass orsteel tube <Used to house bullet, powder andprimer.

CASE BULLET.A bullet formed by pour-ing molten metal into a mold.

CASE CAPACITY. Total volume of caseand piiirner in absence of bullet, powder, and

7----pi+rTfing,composition. Usually expressed incubic wits or in. terms of weight of waterwhich it will contain.

CASE FORMING.Resizing the cartridgecase to a specified size and shape by the useof a resizing die.

CASE GAUGE.An instrument used tomeasure the case length against a''stand-ard7

103

).t

SMALL ARMS. MARKSMANSHIP TRAINING MANUAL

CASE HARDENING.Tbe process used toharden the surface of metal while leaving thecore soft..

CASE TRIMMING. A mettiod of shorten-ing a cartridge case to a specified length.

CAST- FF. The distance the stock is.offset at tli,e heel to the left or right, from aStraight lirie with the axis of bore. It is calledcast-on when to the.left, and cast off when tothe right.

CAST-ON.--(See Cast-Off.)CEASE FIRE .The 'command given to

cause all firing to stop immediately.CENTER.Slang term used to dente a hit

in the center of a target.CENTER FIRE .--Alform of cartridge case

in which the primer is placed directly in thecenter of the base..

CHALLENGE..7When a competitor feelsthat a' shot fired by 'himself or by anothercompetitdr has been improperly evaluated orscored, he may challenge the scoring. Suchchallenge must be made immediately uponannouncement of the score.

CHAMBER.The compartment at the:rearof a gun barrel that, holds a charge or carftridge; one of the compartments in the cylinderof a revolver. To insert a round of ammuni-tion in the chamber of a firearm.

CHAMBER. PRESSURE.Pressure cre-ated-.bythe rapid burning of 11,propellant(powder) within the chamber of .4 weapon,during the instant of firing.' CHAMFER.To bevel. Chamferirigascar-tridge case means beveling the inside oritsmouth by cutting or rolling the edge.

CHARGE given quantity of explosive.The propellant for a bullet or shell. Tocharge a gun, to operate the bolt so as tochamber a roud of ammunition.

CHECKERING . Diamond shaped, regu-larly spaced cuts which form distinctive pat-.terns. on the gunstock grip and forearm. Per-formed by hand, with a checkering tool, or bymachine.

CHEEK PIECE.A projection on the sideof bUttstock comb on which the shooter restshis cheek while aiming the gun.

CHERRY.A fluted tool which cuts thebullet cavity in a bullet mold.

CHIEF RANGE OFFICER.Will- have full'charge of the range and. pits and will conduct

104

the matches on the schedule approved by theexecutive officer. He is responsible for rangesafety, and for enforcing all match rules.

CHOKE.Constriction at the muzzle endof a shotgun barrel which controls shot pat-tern; the difference between bore and paralleldiameters, -expressed in thousandths of. aninch, or points. T'te wider the pattern de-sired, the less the amount-of choke requiredand conversely. Degree of choke is measuredby approximate percentage of pellets in aload striking within a130" circle at 40 yards.

CHRONOGRAPH. An Llectric or elec-tronic device for recording a projectile'stime of flight, from which velocities arecomputed.

CLASSIFICATION.*The average .scoresof an individual; withalyarticular weapon, inmatch conditions, that are used to peimitcompetition between individuals that havesimilar or equal abilities; attempting toeliminate unfair advantages of one personover another, by predicted performance. InNRA matches some classifi'..ations usedare MASTER, EXPERT, SHARPSHOOTER,MARKSMAN.

CLAY BIRD brittle disc which shatterswhen struck by Shotgun pellets. Released byhand, or by mechanical or electrical traps,as a means of shotgun target practice, or inshooting trap or skeet. Same as clay targetor pigeon.

CLEAN TARGET.When all shots have'gone into the highest numerical scoring ringor rings.

CLEANING ROD.A -rod with various at-tachments used in cleaning the bore of aweapon.

CLEAR..Term is used' to describe theIf removing all ammunition from the

weapon to make it safe. r:CLIP.(Cartridge' Clip.) 1., An open top

and bottom metal container for cartridgesthat is pressed into the magazine well. Car-

/tridges are fed from it to the chamber by theloading mechanism: automatic ejection ofthe clip follows feeding of the last cartridge(Mannlicher clip).. 2. Mauser type clip(charger) is a metal band which holds thecartridges. for .stripping into the magazinefrom the top by manual pressure. This typeclip does not remain in the magazine but is

J

Appendix H-- MARKSMANSHIP DICTIONARY

either removed before fi ;ing or ejected bythe closing of: the bolt. ee box magazine(mistakenly called a clip) and revolverclip.

CLIP SLOT.--A pair rifi guide groovesmilled into the forward end of a rifle re-ceiver bridge so as to hold a clip in positionfor loading.

COACH.Shooting trainer or instructor.A member of a team responsible for assist-ing the shooters:

COACH. AND PUPIL.A method of in-struction where two people work together asteacher and student, and the roles may bereversed. This allows both persons to be-come familiarwith 'instructional methods,and of identifying errors in the student.

COACHING SCOPE.The telescope usedon the firing line by the coach to direct orcorrect the shooter firing.

COATED LENS. m floride coat-ing on an optical surface to increase lighttransmission and improve contrast of image.

COCK.To draw the hammer or cockingpiece back into firing position, either man-ually or by pressure on the trigger; also-, toset the trigger for firing. In a half cock po-sition, the hammer or cocking piece is par-tially retracted but mechanically preventedfrom contacting, the firing pin.

COCICNG PIECE.The rear projectton ofthe striker; in some bolt action rifYes it maybe independent of the bolt, thus requiring al.._separate manual operation to cock the rifle.

COMB.-7Top edge of the buttstock.. Afluted comb has a4rounded groove extendingdiagonally rearward for a short distancefrom the front of the comb at the small ofthe stock.

COMBINATION GUN.A three-barreledgun, two of the barrels side by side and thethird centered underneath. See Drilling.Usually has a combination of smoothbore andrifled barrels.

COMMENCE FIRING.Command given tocause shooter to start Cying a prescribedcourse of fire.

COMPE NSATOR.A device used on barrelof a weapon t reduce recoil.

COMPETITION-IN- ARMS. Any test ortrial of abil _in the use at small arms wherea prize is offered.

105

COMPETITOR.An individual- activelyengaged in firing a weapon under match su-pervision. In-a particlaklar club, organization,or match, eligibility or status of a competitoris usually outlined in the match program.

COMPONENT.A constituent part of a.Whole, especially one having no function apartfrom the whole. Such as, cartridge compo-nents (primer, powder, projectile).

CONE.The angle cut in the breech end ofa barrerto allow the bolt to be breechedtighter and therefore, keep as much of thebrass case in the chamber as possible.

CONTROLLED EXPANSION.A .bu 1 le twhose expanding qualities are controlled- byan additional soft metal tip over the leadcore-Which permitS entrance of the bullet toa certain .depth within animal tissue beforecomplete expansion takes place.

CONVERSION UNIT.A assembly whichpermits firing of a smaller caliber cartridgethan the one for which the weapon was orig-inally designed.

COOK-OFF.Unexpected discharge ofa cartridge, due to in tense barrel heat;uncommon except in fully automatic- arms.

CORDITE .Anearly double base smoke-less powder, formed...by absorbing nitro-glycerine in guncotton, adding a small per-centage of vaseline, and extruding the-..mixturethrough a die into long strings or cards.

CORE. The internal part of a bullet; thatwhich is covered by the jacket.

CORROSION.-.-Che'rilical attack of metalsresulting in removal ,of the part attached.

COURSE OF FIRE .Plkescribed positions,number of shots, distance, and time.

CREEP.Trigger movement prior to searrelease:

CRIMP.To mechanically fold inward themouth of a-cartridge case about the base ofthe bullet, sealing it in place.

CRIMPED PRIMER.A center fire primernot only friction-held by the primer jacket,but also held by crimping the primer jacketlip over the edge of the primer; a militaryactice.

CRITCHFIELD.A course of fire used insmall bore competition.

CROSS BOLLA movable, locking bar atright angles to the bore, which either locksor strengthens the locking mechanism of. a

SMALL ARMS MARKSMANSHIP TRAINING 'MANUAL

closed treech, usually that of a 'break opentype shotgun. Some bolt action guns may usea cross bolt to lock the bolt in an open posi-tion. ?

CROSS FIRE.Two or more intersectinglines of gunfire. In competitive shooting,when a competitor fires on a .target. other[loin his DIV11.

CROSS HAIR.Type of reticle used intelescopic sights.

CROWN.The angled cut made at themuzzle end of a barrel to eliminate burrs.

CUFF SLING.A ride Sling,usci with therifle and one arm, as an auxiliary Lo steadythe rifle. Usually made of leather, one ormore _pieces, may be padded. may strap onor hook on. Gives more comfortable supportthan the military type sling, when on the armfor long -periods of time.

CUPRONICKEL.,Copper and niekle alloy.Cupronickel jackets often are used to encasea lean or alloy bullet. . .

CUTOFF.A device employed on somebolt action rifles (e.g.,Springfield '03) whichhas,three,.positions, one allowing bolt manip-ulation without follower..interference whenunloaded, another boll -removal, and the thirdfor normal bolt movement when loaded... CYCLE RATE.Theite at which a suc-cession of movements 'beats i'self, appliedto Lhe ritte-Qffir f air',automatic weapon.

CYLINDER . - -1R.1. 'rue diameter of the boreof a shotgun ba el,.hence without any de-gree_ o.fs..c ( : , Delivers a 25`..1- to 35'.i shotcharge pattern. See Choke. 2. A rouncl=steelblock, the inside of which is bored with mul-tiple chambers for holding cartridges. Usedas the loading device for revolvers; formerlyin some types of rifles (notably Colt) but tiowobsolete.

DAMASCUS BARREL. Shotgun barrel ofalternate strips of welded iron and steel;made fOr black powder shells-unsafe for usewith modern shells. Also known as twist orlaminated bark"es.

DANGER ZONE Any area forward of the-firing line.

DCM (DIRECTOR OF CIVILIAN MARKS-MANSHIP).GeneralSection 4307, Title 10,U. S. Code, authorizes the Secretary of theArmy to appoint an officer of the Army or

106

Marine Corns. as Director ofCivijian Marks -manship (DCM). The Office of the Directoris the implementing agency -for the NationalBoard for the Promotion of Rifle Practice.,The Director of Civilian Marksmanship isresponsible for implementing the policiesestablished by the Board as approved by thePresident for the Secretary of- the Army.

DEAD ROD,A slang term applied to op-erating rod on M-1 rifle, when rod is out ofadjustment, or without spring back.

RECAPPING. The act of removing aprimer,. live or fired. from a cartridge. Arod known as a decapping pin _is insertedthrough the mouth of the case to effect re-

r1moval.DEGRESSIVE POWDER.A propellant

whose surface nea and rate of evolution ofas decreases as the powder burns.

DEWAR COURSE.In small bore rifleshooting, a two-sttige course of fire. It con.:

sist.s of twenty shots at fifty yards and twentyshots at 100 yards on -standard American tar-gets for the .respective distance. Coursesmay be fired with either scope or metallicsights, in accordance with the match pro-g m

tool used to cut, stamp; or formmetal by pressure.

DISABLED WEAPON.An NRA competi-tive rule term used to signify a weapon whichCannot be 'safely aimed or fired because ofloss or damage to sights or mechanical .failure.

DISASSEMBLE .--To take apart.DISQUALIFY The act of making a com-

petitor ineligible forfurther participation forreasons of safety or infringement of matchrules or regulations.

DISTINGUISHED BADGE.--These badgesare awarded to qualified personnel to providean incentive to greater training l and astangible public evidence of recognition for theattainment of an eminent degree of marks-manship skill with the service rifle and pistol.The Distinguished Badge will be ayarded.to.a member after 30 credit points htive beenawarded to him.

DOPING.The process of "-figuring byp;LIOSS or estimate the adjustments r com-pensations necessary to sight a gun 10 pointof aim.


DOUBLE.-1. Usually 'designates a dditblebarreled shotgun. 2. Two holes in a papertarget almOst appear to have betinmade by. one shot instead Of two

DOUBLE BASE POWDER.A nitrocellu-lose smokeless powder mixed with up to 40'rnitroglycerin.

DOUBLE RIFLE.A non-report/Mg gunwith two separate rifled barrels,uSually sideby side, each barrel capable of firing one shotwithout reloading.

DOUBLE aET TRIGGER.A. unit twotriggers,o front of the other which pro-,vides a tvo-stagehaMmer fall that improves-speed and delicacy of firing. Release of onetrigger, usually' the rear, :zets the other on avery fine sear that can be released in turnby a light touch.

DOUBLING.- -The unintentional firing ,o1-two shots simultaneously' (as in double bar-reled gun) or in succession with 4,1 singletrigger pull -through mayunctidniiig of themechanism.

DOVETAIL. A metal block with a wedge-shaped cross section fur inserting metallicsights. ,Attached to the barrel-or top of re-ceiver by cretv- pr dovetailing the base ofthe block into the Metal. 3 8" is the stand-ard size.

DRAM.Unit of weight. 1/16 oz., oi;.256drams to 1 lb. aVoirdupois. Three drams ofblack powder (formerly the standard shotguncharge) equalS 82 grains (27..34. gr. to adram). Abbreviation: dr.

DRAM EQUIVALENT (DR. EQUIV.).Since a smaller weight of the more powerfulsmokeless powder is needed fo create allygiven muzzle velocity obtainable with black-powAr,the powder content of a modern s1T- it-shell is designated in terms of equivalenceto the dram weight of black powder.

DRIFT. -- Deviation of -a projectile fromthe plane of departure -due to its rotation.See Bullet Deflection.

DRILLING,A combination shotgim andrifle formerly made in Germany, usually withtwo shotgun barrels side by side and a rifledbarrel centered underneath.

DROP,The vertical drop of a projectile.Distance measured from the line of sight tothe top of heel and comb of a gun stock.

DROP BLOCK ACTION.Leve operated-breechblcck which .moves vertically in re-ceiver side wall grooves,.

DRY' FIRE.PractiCe With an unloadedfirearm. Same as dry shootinkor snappingin.. DUD.A cartridge that has failed to func-tion.

DUMMY CARTRIDGE,A,cartricige with-out powder or primer.

107

EAR PLUG.--Device used to protect theear from damage, caused by 'the sound ofweapons firing.

EARLY SHOT.--A terni used in- competi-tive shooting, to identify a round fired beforethe command "Commence Firing has been

EFFECTIVE RANGE.The distance atwhich .a weapon can be used by the averageman to place hits in the kill area of a target.

EJECTION.The process where a case orcartridge is being thrown from the weapon ,-by the ejector,

EJEC TOR . A part in a firearm for throw-ing out shells or cartridges.

ELBOW PAD.A cushion for the elbowusually attached to the shooting jacket orcoat,

ELECTRIC FURNACE.A melting potused to heat lead alloy used for casting.

ELECTRIC TRAP. - -A device used in eithersheet or trap:shooting to throw the clay tar-get into the air. 0

ELEVATED RIB.The raised -sightingplane placed' on top of the barrels of a shot- :gun or rifle.

EXCELLENCE-IN-COMPETITIONBADGE. A place medal awarded in matchesdesignated as allowing credit points towardthe award of a' distinguished badge.

EXTENDED FRONT SIGHT.A bar o;steel or extension of front sight to increasesight radius.

'EXTRACTION,--The process at removinga live or spent shell or cartridge case fromthe chamber.

EXTRACTOR .A part in a gun for remov-ing shells or cartridges from the chamber.

EYE RELIEF.DiStance from the'ainiingeye to the rear sight,


FAMILIARIZATION.Applied to an in-dividual who fails to fire/a qualifying score,of marksman or higher, when firing forrecord over a qualifying course. Indicatesindividual is safe to handle and carry aweapon n: the performance of his duty, buthas not met the minimum marksmanshipstandard.

FAIVIILIARIZATION RING.Practicefiring with a weapon.

FEEDING.The process of driving livecartridges from the magazine into the pathof the bolt or slide prior to chambering.

FEED RAMP.A .slanted metal surfaceat the rear of a barrel which guides car-tridges into the chamber.during feeding.

FEET PER SECOND (FPS), A unit ofmeasure usually used to indicate the velocityof a bullet.

FIELD OF VIEW.--A measure of thediameter of the field of vision which the ob-server can see at one time while lookingthrough the telescope..

FIELD .:STRIP. --To disassemble the majorcomponents of a machine gun, cannon, orother fire arm for cleaning, inspection, ofthe like.

FINAL BULLETIN. A competitive termto denote the final score of each match,fired, which has been posted for public view,after having been checked for accuracy,and each competitor has had the opportunityto challenge the accuracy of the postedscore.

FIRE FASTER.A rifle coa9hing termused when the coach desires to acceleratethe competitors rate of fire.

FIRE FORM.To Shape a cartridge caseby firing it in a large chamber. The explod-ing gases expand the case and cause it toform to the diameteand shape of the cham-ber.

FIRING LINE.A\--line at which men arestationed for firing; the men stationed at sucha line.

FIRING PIN.A rod or plunger in a gun,mine, bomb, shell, OY the like'that strikesand detonates a sensitive explosive to firethe main explosive or propelling charge.

FIRING POINT.A firing station on a fir-ing line.

J

108

FIRM GRIP.A commercial rosin-likepaste, used to prevent slippage when handlingweapons, or any combination thereof.

FLASH HOLE.A hole in the head of thecartridge case through which the primerflash ignites the propellant.

FLAT BASE.Type of base used' on abullet.

FLAT HOUSING.The .45 Automatic Pis-tol mainspring housing, with the rear portionstraight or flat where it contacts the palm ofthe hand.

FLINCH.A spasmodic, physical reac-tion (caused by the anticipated explosive\sound or recoil of a weapon) which causes in-accuracy in shooting...

FLOOR PLATE.The base or bottom ofa magazine, either d e t a c ha b 1 e or non-detachable type.

FLUX.,A substance or mixture used tofacilitate the amalgamation of metals orminerals when melting them, glass, borax,etc., are fluxes.

FOLDED.A cartridge in which the baseof the case is folded to form-the printerpocket.

FOLLOWER.That part of the magazineon which the cartridge's rest for feeding.

FOLLOWER SPRING.A spring thattransmits its energy for function to the fol-lower.

FOLLOW THROUGH.When all the die-,nients of firing. a shot are maintained untilthe shot strikes the target, such as position,sighting, squeezing, breathing, etc.

FOREARM.That portion of the stock ly-ing under the barrel in front of the action,also called the fore-end.

FOREND.(See Forearm.)FORESTRAP.Front of a revolver or

pistol grip.FOULING.The accumulation of a deposit

within the bore of a firearm caused by solidproducts remaining after a cartridge has beenfired.

FOULING- SHOTS.Shots fired for thepurpose of warming the bore so that follow-ing rounds will be better stabilized.

FRAME.A receiver.FRANGIBLE BULLET. --A brittle plastic

or other nonmetallic bullet for firing practice

LnAppendix IIMARKSMANSHIP DICTIONARY

which, upon striking a target, breaks intopowder or small fragments without penetrat-ing.. NOTE: Frangible bullets are usuallydesigned to leave a mark at the point of im-pact.

FREE BORE.A type of barrel rifling'where lands have either been completelyeliminated, or reduced, in front of the cham-ber, purpose being to reduce chamber pres-sure.

FREE FIRE . A tern) used in internationaltype competition denoting rifles whose,onlyrestrictions are: (a) The weight must notexceed 8 kilograms and the caliber must notexceed 8 millimeters. (b) The rifle- musthave been examined and passed as-'Life bythe controller of arms. (c) Telescope sights.are prohibited. Filters may be used withinthe scope of ISU rules. (d) The lower part ofthe grip for the right'hand (left hand for v.left handed shooter) must not be extended ina way that it may serve as a support againstthe sling or the left arm.

FREE PISTOL.A term used in inter-.national type competition, den-OtinV_. a pistolwhose only restrictions are bore (.22 cal)grips (must nv,togilre support to anything buthand), and she ts (mtist not be optiCal)'.

FOOT MOUNDS (FT/LBS).A 'measure-ment of energy.

FROG. A slang term used for the metaltwo pranged fastening hook on leather rifle

FULL METAL CAA' .A bullet completelyjacketed. All service aTmunition.

FULL PATCH. (See kull Metal Case.). Aslang term for full metal case.

.,.''FULMINATE OF MERCURY.(SeeCUry Fulminate.)

FUNCTION. Operate, used in conjunctionwith the 'cycle of operation in a weapon.

GAIN TWIST.A system of rifling in Whichthe pitch of the lands and groovers increasesfrom breech to muzzle in order to graduallyaccelerate a bullet to Maximum rotationalvelocity as it leaves the muzzle.

GALLERY.An indoor rifle or pistolrange.

GAS CHECK BULLET.A device (usuallyshaped like a cup) fitted over the base of abullet designed to prevent the hot gases from

fusing or melting the base of the bullet andto act as a gas seal.

GAS-OPERATED.Of an automatic orsemi-automata: weapon; that utilizes part ofthe expanding powder gases in the Darrel tounlock the bblt and actuate the loading mech-,anism,

GAS PORT.in gas- operated weapons, asmall hole drilled into the barrel throughwhich some of the expanding powder gases'escape to furnish power for the auto-loadingcycle.

GAUGE OR GAGE).(a) A measurement:standard measure, or scale of measurement.(b) Dimensl'On; capacity, extent. The size ofthe bore of a firearm, especially of a shot-

-pin, as determined by the number per poundof spherical projectiles fitting the bore.

GILDING METAL.Soft metal used tojacket a small arms bullet, this metal can bereadily engraved by the lands as the bulletmoves down the bore.

GLASS SIGHT.A slang term used to de-note any sight that utilizes glass. Usuallyreferred to as a telescopic sight or one thatmagpif ies

GRAIN.A unit of weight, 7000 grains to1 pound weight.

GRAPHITE.A soft form of carbon usedas a lubricant and a glaze for grains of pro-pellant to prevent the buildup of static elec-

. tricity and the attendant danger of prematureexplosions. Also used as a flash inhibitor.

GRAVITY FACTOR.The rate of accel-eration of a falling body towards the earth.

GROOVE.(See Rifling.)'GROUND CLOTH OR GROUND PAD.

Cloth material laid on the ground to protecta shooter and his equipment.

GROUP.Short for bullet group.GUN.A mechanism cons:isting essen-

tially of a barrel, receiver and breeCh mech-anism, using controlled explosives to shootprojectiles or signal flares.

GUNCOTTON.A high explosive formedby the action of sulphuric and nitric acidupon cellulose.. Its shattering effect orbrisa.nce is too high for it to be used a-iaprOpellant, but when used with nitroglycerineand suitable amounts -)f solvents, it formsthe main ingredient of many modern pro-pellants.

109

.

SMALL ARMS MARKSIVIANSIiIP TRAINING MANUAL

GUNSMITH.A person who ma'keS- or re-'pairs small arms.

GYROSTATIC STABILITY.--In firearms,imparting the necessary spin to a projectilearound its longitudinal axis, either by riflingor fins, to enable the projectile to presentits point in the direction'of motion, and in-suring that the projectiles point follows itstrajectory:

HAMMER.The mechanism that strikesthe firing pin or percussion cap in afirearm.

HAMMER GUN...7.A gun_ whose hamme-rsare on the outside of the action.

if.A:MMERLESS.-7A gun whose hammersare concealed Within.

HAND GUARD.A wood or metal cover-which encloses the upper half of a rifle bar-rel and ,prOtects the firers hands from heatgenerated by firing.,

'HAND- LOADING.Manufacturers of am-Munition by an individual using hand tools.

,`" HAND (PISTOL).The operating leverwhich tttrns the cylinder when the hammeris pulled back on the receiver.

HANOFIllE.--A brief delay of a roul:d ofammunition- in firing pfter being struck or`subjected to other igniting action.

HARD BALL.A colloquial term used todescribe Government Issue ball ammunition;usually used tc describe "cartridge, ball,-Cal. .45".

HEAD (CARTRIbGE CASE).Portion ofcartyidge case, which includes the extractiongroover or rini, primer pocket and primer.

HEADSPACE.The distance between theface of the locked bolt or 'breechblock of agun and some specified point in the clic tuber.NOTE:. With guns designed for rimless,bottle-necked cartridges, headspace. is thespace between the bolt face: and a specifiedpoint on the shoulder of the chamber; withguns using rimmed cartridges, the spacebe-tween the bolt face and the ridge or abutmentin the chamber against which the rim rests;and with -guns using rimless straight-casecartridges, the space between the bolt faceand the ridge or point in the chamber wherethe mouth of the cartridge case rests.

HEAD STAND.Markings on the head ora, cartridge case that usually indicate sourceand date of manuiacture,

110

HEAVY SLIDE.Addition of weight to aslide to reduce recoil while

HEEL.(a) The upper rear corner of arifle buttstock. The top of the butt plate. (b)..Heeling is caused by a firer's tightening thelarge muscle the heel of the hand to keepfrom jerking the trigger.

HIGH HC,USE.The structure located onthe left 'side Of a skeet.rige. Name derivedfrom the fact, that the target is thrown from

,

the upper portio. ri of the st-ucture.HIGH-- MICRQ.(See Micro-Sights.) A

commercial rear sight with a--standard dove--'tail.

HIT.To hold fire, torefrain from firingat a target; to hold fire, the command given.Sight' pictures obtained by the shooter de-setibed as hold, i.e., 6 o'clock or center hold.

HOLD CLOSER.7A,command that is giventhe shooter by the coach to 'indicate that heshould raise his sight picture,: as he is shoot-ing low. Used only by the coach in Hi-Powerrifle and rapid fire.

HOT.,LOW POINT.A projectile with acavity within its point. May or may not havecontrolled expansion. .

HOME RANGE_MATCH..--.7(See PostalMatchj.,' HOODED SIGHT.A projectile circularcovering placed around the front sight toprevent damage. Fixed front sight some-times confused with globe sight which hasinterchangeable. front sights.

HOOK.(a), Butt extension of 4 rifle whichfits under the arm pit of the shooter"' Some-times inverted to fit over the shoulder forprone shobting. (b) Sometimes used to de-scribe how to grasp the rifle in the off-hand

-position.HOUSING.A covering or frame to pro-

tect integral parts of a firear'in,i.e,a main,SprIng housing, trigger housing.

-IMMEDIATE ACTION.The action a per-son performs when a stoppage has occurredin a Weapon to put the weapon back into op,eration with little no loss of time.

IMPACT.The striking of!..a projectile orbomb on the target or surface.

IMPACT AREA.Area in which projec-tiles or bombs strike or are expected tostrike.


IMPROVED CYLINDER.Type of choke,on a shotgun which- controls shot pattern.Built into barrel containing a minimum de-gree of choke;

I.M.R.Improved Military Rifle powder,a prefix designation of E. I. duPont deNemours and Co., Inc., for their commercialrifle powder with nitrocellulose base.

INFANTRY TROPHY MATCH.A highpower rifle match using silhouette targets.Team is composed of six firing members,two coaches, using a limited amount of ammo.

INITIATOR. -A sensitive explosive thatdetonates to initiate the action in an explo-sive train. NOTE: An explosive such as leadoxide, combines the properties of sensitivity,low brisance , is commonly used as an initia-tor

INSIDE LUBRICATED.Bullet is lubri-cated before loading. Bullet also containslubricant. grooves that are not visible in thefinished cartridge.

INTERNATIONAL SHOO TING UNION(ISU).-70tganization similar to the NRA,which governs international type shooting. Itis not a branch of the NRA.

INVITATIONAL.An invitational match isa match in which participation is limited tothose who have been invited to compete.

IRON SIGHTS.A colloquial term mean-ing metallic sights. (See Metalkic Sights.)

JACKET.The metal covering of a bullet.JAM.To stick or become inoperatiVe be-

cause of improper loading, ejection, or thelike of a machine gun full-automatic, semi-automatic, or other firearm.

JERK.The effort by the firer to fire apistol or rifle at the time the sights,align with the target, iisuaily causing a badhit on the, target.

JEWEL .A process whereby certain partsof a weapon are polished in a circular pat-tern, to give a high metallic luster.

KEEPER.--Par of the sling used on therifle the prevent the sling from comingloose, may be leather rings or metal hooks.

KENTUCKY WINDAGE.--A form of sight-ing and aiming usually employed when aweapon has nonadjustable sights or when the

firer does not have the time to make sightadjustments. -

KEYHOLING.--Tumbling of bullet inflight caused by failure of the bullet to re-ceive sufficient spin from the rifling in thebarrel.

KICK.Used to describe the recoil of afirearm at the moment of,firing.

KINETIC ENERGY.That energy exertedby, or inherent in, a moving particle or par-ticl7s, or in a moving body, by virtue of itsmotion: more technically, the capacity Of amoving particle or body for performing work,

'owing to its motion, being quantitatively one-half the mass times the velocity squared.

KNEELING PAD.Most frequently re-ferred to as kneeling roll. A cylindericalpad approximitely 8 inches long and 4 to 6incites in diameter that is placed under theankle or shinbone of the leg while in the highkneeling positions-. More frequently referredto as a kneeling roll. May be used accordingto NRA Rule 5.10, and if so, size is cylindri-cal, approximately 8 inches long and 4 to 6inches in diameter. Different rules apply forISU. It is called a cushion. Size is 12 to 13ems (4.72" to 5.12") or 16 to 18 ems (6.30"to 7.09"), both 20 ems (7.88") in length.

KNEELING POSITIONS.A )sition thatis assumed by the shooter (pis. 1 or rifle)where the weight of the body is supported onone knee and the opposite foot. No othei part

of the body touching the ground.KNOWN DISTANCE FIRING'. The purpose

of this type of firing is to givei the shooterthe opportunity to apply all the principles ofmarksmanship. He learns to zero his weaponfor all usable ranges and to make practicalapplication of sight adjustments.

KNURL..To checker or roughen a metalsurface to afford a better grip. It is usedon pistol grips, windage screws, elevationscrews, etc.

111

LAMINATED STOCK.Theglueing of thinstrips or sheets of wood together in order toproduce a gunstock that will retard warpageand give added strength, usually used on tar-get and bench rest stocks.

LAND.(See Rifling.) One of the raisedridges in the bore of a rifled gun barrel.


LAP.A plug usually made of lead, ironor copper, when charged with abrasive, isused for fine grinding or polishing.

-LATE SHOT.- ' shot is fired a momentafter the time limit has expired; i.e., a shotis fired as the target is turning.

LEAD. (a) The action of aiming ahead ofa moving target with a gun, bomb, rocket, ortorpedo, so as to hit the target, includingwhatever action is necessary to correct fordeflection. (b) the lead angle. (c) The dis-tance between the moving target and the pointat which the gun or missile is aimed.

LEADED BARREL.Excessive lead de-posit in groove of barrel.

LEADED EDGE.The marks left on thetarget by the bullet as it passes through thetarget.

LEAF SIGHT.Rear sight for small arms,hinged so that it can be raised for aiming orlowered to keep from being broken when notin use. A leaf sight contains a peep sightthat can be moved up and down to make ad-justenents for range.

LEG.A slang term for Excellence-in-Competition Badge.

LEG MATCH.A slang term for a NBPRPapoved match in which Excellence-in-C ,petition Badges may be worn.

LEG MEDAL.See Excellence-in-Com-petition Badge.

LENGTH 0.F PULL.--The distance fromthe center of trigger to the center of butt.Standard length of pull is approximately13 1/2 for rifles. NOTE: Center of buttmeasured midway from heel to toe.

LEVER.The moving handle, the workingof which locks or unlocks the action in gunsor double rifles. There are several forms,such as top-lever, side-lever, under-lever,etc.

LEVER ACTION.A rifle whose action isoperated by a lever under .he stock. Thelever usually serves as a trigger guard aswell as an actuating device.

LIFE MASTER. An individual in a masterclass may, upon application to the NRA, bece.--tified as a lifetime master and will beissued a special card so indicating. A com-petitor may be a lifetime master for one typeof competition and in a lower class for other

112

types. The election herein provided for,once made, shall be irrevocable.

LINE OF BORE.The extended bore axisof a gun.

LLNE OF SIGHT.The straight line be-tween an observers eye and a target or otherobserved object or spot, along which sight istaken; specifically, the straight line betweeneye and target in gunnery, bombing, or rocketfiring.

LOAD.(a) To place ammunition in a gull.(b) A particular combination of componentsthat comprise a loaded cartridge.

LOADING.Device designed to limit aspecified number of rounds, i.e., plug inshotgun is a form of a loading block.

LOADING GATE.--Swing away portion ofa revolver which permits,loading and unload-ing from the cylinder. This is normallyfound on single action revolvers.

LOCKING LUGS.Extension on a lockingmechanism that locks fhe breech. Metalprotuberances which form an integral partof a breech block and fits into a correspond-ing set of slots when the breech is closed,locking the gun for firing.

LONG ROUND.A term used to denote around of ammunition that is out of alignmentin a clip or magazine and when inserted intothe weapon will cause it to jam.

LONG TRIGGER.Type of trigger found inthe 1911 model .45 Cal. Pistol. StandardGovernment Issue.

LOW HOUSE.A house from which claybirds are thrown in skeet low to ground.Located on right side on range.

LOW MICRO.A commercial rear sightwith a wide dove-tail base, the slide or re-ceiver must be milled to accept this sight.

LUBRICATE.A substance used to re-duce friction, i.e., oil, greaZe-;-Kax, etc.

LUBRICATION GROO V E.Groover orgrooves on a bullet that are filled with alubricant. See also Inside Lubricated.

MACHINE REST.A device used to securea weapon in place to check functioning, ac-curacy and ammunition.

MAGAZINE.(a) A structure or compart-ment for storing ammunition or explosives.(b) That part of a gun or firearm that holds


ammunition ready for chambering. NOTE:in sense (b), magazines for small arms maybe detachable or nondeta:hable from the restof the piece. A box magazine is a detachablemagazine in the shape of a rectangular box.See also Clip.

MAGGIE'S DRAWERS.A slang term forthe red flag that is used to signal a miss inhigh power rifle shooting.

MAGNAGLO:Used for same purpose asmagnaflux, slightly different process. Useof blacklight and special dye.

MAGNAFLUX.A process used for de-tecting invisible minute cracks and flaws inin ferrous metal. Use of powdered metal.

MAGNUM.A term used to denote aweapii5ii of more than normal power.

MAINSPRING.That part of a weapoii whichfurnishes energy to the hammer or striker.

MAKE THE LINE SAFE .Command givento cause shooters to make weapons safe, andto ground them and to step back away fromthe firing line.

MALFUNCT1ON.The improper opera-tion of any part o a weapon that may or maynot stop it from fi, ring.

MARK.A command used in high powerrifle shooting to cause target operators topull target, insert spotting disk, and raiseand indicate score with disk.

MARKLNG DISK . When targets are scoredfrom pits, a colored disk on a rod is used tosignal the value of the shots. (See Scoring.)

MARKSMAN..See Classification.MARKSMANSHIP.Skill in hitting the

mark with any small arms. Also, anythingpertaining to small arms including trainingmid competition in the use of small arms.

MASTER.See Classification and LifeMaster.

MATCH. A competition consisting of oneor more states. It may, in the case of aggre-gate matches, include the score fired in sev-eralsubsidiary matches.

MATCH CONDITIONED WEA::'ON. Anysmall arms which has been made to shootmore accurately than issued or made spe-cifically for the use in competition.

MATCH GRADE.Special weapons, am-munition or equipment manufactured forcompetitive match purposes.

113

MATCH GRADE AMMUNITION.Ammu-nition made specifically for use dn' competi-tion shooting.

MATCH PISTOL.A pistol manufacturedor modified to special tolerances for-Com-petitive shooting.

MATCH RIFLE .A rifle manufactured ormodified to special tolerances for competi-tive match use.

MAXIMUM EFFECTIVE RANGE.Thegreater: distance, the average shooter maybe .expected to inflict casualties or damage.

MAXIMUM ORDINATE. Highest point (if,.trajectory above the line of sight.

MAXIMUM RANGE.A capability of anaircraft, gun, radar transmitter, or the likethat expresses the most distance point to whichthe aircraft can fly, the gun can shoot,etc.

MECHANICAL TRAINING.Training con-ducted for purpose of teaching disassemblyand assembly of weapons, cleaning and func-tioning.

MEDAL.(a) A piece of metal struck orcast as the symbol of an award to a person. (b)The award represented by this piece of metal.

MELTING POT.Container used in theprocess of melting metal components forbullet casting.

MERCURIC PRIMER.A primer contain-ing a chemical compound of fulminate ofmercury. This Compound causes severe de-terioration of brass case.

MERCURY FULMINATE. An explosiveextremely sensitive to shock, spark, or fric-tion, used to set-off other explosives.

METALLIC SIGHTS.Any sight not con-taining a lens or system of lenses; except asingle lens may be attached to the rear sightas a substitute or adaition to prescribedspectacles. (NRA 3.7, Rifle.) Any sight (in-cluding tube sights) not containing a 'lens orsystem of lenses; except a single lens may beattached to the rear sight as a substitute oraddition to prescribed spectacles. A coloredfilter type lens may be attached to either frontor rear sight.

MICRO SIGHTS.A commercial rearsight, adjustable for windage and elevationthat can be used on most all pistols.

MICROMETER SIGHTS. Normally re-ferred to a rear sight which has 1/4 minute

. SMALL ARMS MARKSMANSHIP TRAINING MANUAL

or less graduations. The rear sight of aweapon, employing .a system of preciseadjustment, so exact corrections,may be ap-plied to the path of the bullet, as determinedby aim. Calibration for correction is minute

. of angle. Graduations or movement of thesight adjustment are-usually 1/8, 1/4, -or 1/2minute angles. The same system of adjust-ment is applied to precision rifle telescopes.

MID-RANGE .The point half-way betweenthe firing line and the target.

MIL.A unit of angular measurement usedin and in the launching of bombs andguided missiles. NOTE: A true mil is theangle determined by an arc the length ofwhich is 1/1000 of the radius. But for prac-tical Krposes, the mil is considered. -to- be1/6400Anstead of !/6283) or 360, which rep-resents a linear measurement of approxi-mately 1/100 Gf the radius for any 'givencircle. Thus, movement of a 1,000-footradius by 1 mil will cause a movement of1 foot, or approximately 1 foot, on the cir--cumference.

MINUTE OF ANGLE.--The sixtieth partof a degree which amounts to about.one inchper 100 yards of distance.

MIRAGE .An optical phenomenon pro-duced by a stratum of hot air of varyingclen-say across.which the observer sees reflec-tions. When using a telescope on the firingline and looking toward. the targets on a brightsunlit day, you can see the mirage as waver-ing heat waves.

MISFIRE .A momentary or permanentfailure of a round of ammunition to fire afterigniting-action'isTtaken: ariinstance of suchfailure.

MISS.An instal-ice of failing to hit a target"with a missile, as in "he had.. two misses, onehit."

MONOCULAR VISION.Viewing with onlyone eye. When one eye is closed in takingsight with a gun, it is a case of monocularvisions,

MONT CARLO.A form of butt stock inwhich the comb is carried back horizontallyalmost to the butt, when it descends abruptlyto the heel portion.

MORE WHITE.Coaches coriimand to ashooter to chango his aiming point slightlylower.

MOULD-, BULLET.An 'implement formoulding bullets.

MOUNTS.Device used for the placementof sights on weapons.

MOUTH. -In old days the muzzle end ofthe barrel was called the mouth. Today werefer to it as muzzle. NOTE: The open endof a cartridge case is also 'called the "mouth."

MUSHROOM.Expansion of a projectile.MUZZLE BLAST.'--Sudden air pressure

exerted at the muzzle of a weapon by the rushof hot gases and air on firing.

MUZZLE BRAKE .Device attached to themuzzle of the gun barrel which utilizes es-

Lcaping gases to reduce the effective recoilforce of the barr&Lassembly on the carriageor Mount. It also reduces muzzle -blast andmuzzle flash. ,2

MUZZLE VELOCITY.The speed of abullet or shell, relative to the gun, at the in-stant it leaves the muzzle.

114

IATIONAL BOARD FOR THE PROMO-TION OF RIFLE PRACTICE (NBPRP). - -Thegoverning board in matters pertaining toNationwide civilian marksmanship training.

NATIONAL MATCH COURSE .7-- (See Land-.ing Party Manual, 1960.)

NATIONAL MATCHES. C o m pet i esmall arms matches held annually under theauspices of the NRA, the NBPRP, and theU. S. Army.

NATIONAL RIFLE ASSOCIATION (NRA).The NRA is a non-profit organization sup-ported by the membership fees of over1 million individual members. Founded in1871, it has grown in size, and stature for87 years. Today, it is recognized for its out-standing patriotic and public service con-,tribution to the American way of life. It isthe .largest organization in the U. S. thatdeals with guns, gunning, and all associatedmaterials and subjects.'

NATIONAL TROPHY MATCH. T ho secompetitions at the National Matches forwhich trophies and medals are provided forby appropriate funds.

NATO CALIBER. Cartridge designed tobe used in weapons of the NATO Nations,.7.62 Cal-: Identic.al with :.Cal. .308 Win-chester.


NATURAL POINT OF AIM.The correctposition of the body in relationship to thetarget.

NECK.That portion of a cartridge usedto retain the rear portion of a bullet,

NECK REAMER -A tool used to slightlyenlarge the nee:, of a cartridge case that hasbeen fired.

NECK SIZE.The inside diameter of acartridge neck.

NECK TRIM.An operation in reloadingused to shorten a cartridge case to a speci-fied length.

NEUTRAL POWDER.A propellant, usu-ally a single perforated cylindrical grain-whose burning area remains constant.

NITROCELLULOSE.See Cellulose Ni-trate. Nitric acid mixed with cotton formingwhat is called gun cotton used in powder.

NITROGLYCERINE.Nitric acid mixedwith glycerine ised in double based powder.

.NOMENCL/,TURE.A Set of systems ofnames or symbols given to items of supplyand equipment, to organizations, or to othervariously identifiable things a3 a means ofclassification and identification.

NONCORROSIVE.A term applied toprimers containing no potassium sulphate.

NOSE.(a) That portion of the hammer inthe K-38 Revolver which strikes the primerof a cartridge. (b) That are of a bullet fromthe widest part to-the point.

NOT READY.The response given by ashooter to the Range Officer: in the event heis not prepared to fire when asked by theRange Officer.

NRA MATCH PISTOLSee Match Pistol.OBJECTIVE LENS.The lens at the front

of the telescope which forms the "primaryimage" of the object viewed.

OBTURATION.The sealing of a chamberin a gun or fuse to prevent the escape of gasin a partictilar direction.

OCULAR LENS.The eyepiece of an, op-tical instrument.

OFFHAND_ An individual, scoring device,target, equipment, or material recognizedand approved by the isTEPRP, NRA, and ISU.,or other appropriate organization in the con-dition of a shooting competitor.

.OFFICIAL BULLETIN.A bulletin issuedby the statistical office after all competitors

115

have been giver an opportunity to call atten-tion to errors shown on the preliminarybulletin. All prizes :nedals are issuedon the basis of the official bulletin which be-comes the official record of the match.

OFFICIAL REFEREE The official ap-pointed by the jurisdictional organizationconducting the competition, to act as refereeand fulfilling all duties and obligations ex-pected of such.

OFFSET (CAST OFF).Butt end of gun-stock set over to the right usually 1/4"to3/4" from center of bore line. NOTE : Cast onwould be the same except set over to the left.

OGIVE (PRONOUNCED 'OH JIVE').Thecurved or tapered front of a projectile.NOTE: With a bullet, shell, or bobb, otherprojectile having a fuze forming the nose,the ogive is included between a pgint wherethe projectile begins to curve or taper and apoint on the line where fuze and body meet;in other types of projectiles, the nose of theprojectile is included as a part of the ogive.(See False- Ogive.)

OPEN MATCH.A match open to anyone.An open match may be limited to citizens ofthe United States or to members of the NRAof America. Such limitations must be statedin the program.

OPEN SIGHT.A rear gunsight having anotch. NOTE: Distinguished especially froma peep sight.

ORDINATE. A measurement made fromthe line of sight to the line of trajectory ofthe bullet at any point.

ORDNANCE.(a) Military weapons, am-munition, explosives, combat vehicles, andbattle material collectively,together with thenecessary maintenance tools and equipment.(b) An organization or activity that stores,issues, or maintains such material.

ORIFICE.A small hole in a weapon, i.e,,gas port.

OUTSIDE LUBRICATED. Lubrication ofa bullet's exterior.

OVER AND UNDER.A gun or rifle inwhich the barrels are placed vertically, oneover the other.

OVERBORE.Usually refem'ed to as acartridge case with a greater powder capa-bility than is considered adequate for the sizeof the bore. NOTE: Most Wildtat Magnums


are usually considered overbore capacity.When a cartridge is in this condition the loadis very critical.

PADDLE.A shot stick with a disk at oneend, painted white on one side and red on theother. Used to indicate when the firing lineis. ready. safe, clear, etc.

PAIR FIRE.When 2 persons are firingenthe same point usually alternating the shotsin a prescribed sequence,

PALM REST.An extension or attachmentbelow the rifle fore..rm Which aids the nor-mal hand grip.

PARADOX.The term used to describe abarrel partially rifled at the muzzle.

PARALLAX. An appaent movement ordisplacement of objects in'the field of viewwith respect to the reticle. In a telescopicsight, parallax occurs only when in the opticalsystem of the scope, the primary i.l.age ofthe object falls behind or in front of thereticleand when the eye moves off of theoptical axis of the scope.

PARAPET.An earthern mound protect-ing ranges.

PARKERIZE .To impact a dull, relativelyrough finish to a firearm by use of powderediron and phospheric acid. Hence Parkeriza-tion, Parkertzed.

PASTPRS.Small gummed pieces of paperused to patch bullet holes on the target.

PATH. Flight of bulle't; a walk way totargets.

PATTERN.Usually referred to in thegunsmAhing field commenly called"checker-ing pattern.", This pattern conforms with thestock configuration and incorporates borderand all master lines.

PEENING.To draw, bend, or flatten byhammering with peen.

PEEP SIGHT.A' rear gunsight having asmall hole in which the front sight is centeredin aiming. Distinguished-from an open sight.

PELLET.(a) One of a group of projec-:tiles in shotgun shells. (b) A projectile firedfrom 'Various guns that do.not use gunpowderas the propellent force.-'

PENETRATE.To force a 7:-ay into a tar-get or other substance.

PILOT SHOT. Dhring alter nate highpower rifle team firing, the first shot fired

116

by which corrections may be established forwind and range conditions.

PISTOL.(a) In popular usage, a firearm,usually short barreled, designed to be heldand fired in one 'hand. (b) More precisely,such a firearm in which the chamber is anintegral part of thb barrel, especially a self-loading, pistol, .as distinguished from'. a re-volver.' (el A -nachine pistol usually a shortbarreled weapon, firing pistol am.atniition,and which fires full automatic.

PISTOL GRIP.It: gunstock the grip ofwhich turns down, as does a pistol.

PIT.(a) Individual fire trench; smallhole to afford shelter from fire. (b) Shelterfor personnel operating the targets at an openair target range. (c ) Sunken emplacement forartillery.

PITCH.The angle which the butt of afirearm takes in relation to the line of sight.

PLUNGERS.(a) Any cylindrical part thatoperates with a plunging action, such as apiston. (b) The firing pins which are struckby the hammers in shotguns and double rifles,called strikers in bolt - action rifles.

POINT.Firing stand; nose of -bullet; topoint at object or target.

POSITION.A prescribed physical methodof holding a weapon.

POST.Refers to post sight, a .verticalfront sight, hence the term post. It may bemetallic, open or hooded, or may be incor-porated in several manners and shapes,within telescOpic sights.

POST ENTRY.An entry, made after theregular entry closing time. Because of theextra worktplaced on the statistical office asti result of late entries an addticnial fee ischarged (the "post entry fee"). Sometimesno post entries are accepted. "Post Entries"have:no connection with. "Postal Matches."

POSTAL MATC niatch in which com.-petitors fire on their home ranges using tar-gets which -have been marked for properidentification. Fired targets and scores arethen exchanged by mail.

POTASSIUM NITRATE.A corrosive saltfound in Black Powder composition, com-monly called saltpeter.

POWDER.AI slang for gun powder; anySubstance in the form of balls, cords, strips,flakes or bare that can be used as a vropellent

--1--

Appendix IIMAR XSMANSHIP DICTIONARY

in a cartridge. A dry explosive or propellent,often in the form of one or more large pieces.

POWDER MEASURE.Various mechani-cal means by which weight or volume of pow-der may be measured,

POWDER SCALE. A device used to meas.-,ure powder by weight.

POWER (SCOPE).Number of times anobject is nn?,gnified by use of a telescope.Example: 2C Limes its size or 20X, etc. Thedegree to which a lens magnifies the numberof times it multiplies the apparent diameterof an object.

PRELIMINARY BULLETIN. A bulletinissued by the statistical office 'mmediatelyafter a match has been fired showing scoresof competitors as computed in the statisticaloffice. Competitors check with statisticaloffice on any apparent inaccuracies as shownby this bulletin...

PREPARATION PERIOD.A specifiedperiod of time,allotted in competition whichenables the shooter to prepare for firing.Usually a period of 3 minutes.'

PRESSURE.Force extended against anopposing body.

PRESSURE CURVE.(a), The arc of theprojectile in the LaBoulenge Chronographtest to determine velocity. (b) The graphiccurve of...pressures in pounds per sq. inch,-resulting from various powder burning rates.

PRESSURE PEAK; The greatest amountof pounds per sq. inch, pressure createdwithin the chamber.

PRIMER.A sensitive ex-plosive devicethat responds to percussion, friction, elec-tric impulse, or some other disturbance toset off a propellent or an explosive; an ini-tiator.

PRIMER CUP.A small cup holding aprimer mixture and other components, usedin small -arms cartridges and certain otherammunition.

PRIMER POCKET.A recess formed inthe head of a cartridge case to hold theprimer.

PRIMER SALT.A residue of potassiumchlorate which is deposited in the borethrough the use of corrosive primers.

PRIMER SETBACK. The backward move-ment of a primer cup in a cartridge or shellcase upon explosion of the propellent, as

occurs when the base of the cup is not prop-erly supported by the bolt face or breechblock.

PRIMER VENT.Normally ,,called theflash hole located in the head of the cartridgecase between the primer sent'and 6ropellentin the case to allow the primer flame toignite the powder.

PROGRESSIVE BURNING.A character-istic-of most rifle powders whose burning in-creases as the volume increases to maintain.an increase in pressure on the base of theprojectile.

PROJECTILE.(a.) An object, especiallya missile, projected by an applied exteriorforce and continuing in motion by virtue ofits own inertia, as a bullet, bomb, shell, orgrenade. (b) Also applied to rockets, espe-cially rocket missiles and guided missiles.

PROOF. --A standard set by gun manufac-tUrers to insure a weapon will withstand asafe pressure for its given caliber.

PROOF MARK.A stamp used by gunmanufacturersto identify all weapons havingmet the standard prescribed pressure test itconsidered safe. Proof marks are usuallyfound on the barrel and/or under the receiveror both, depending upon its manufacturer.

PROOF TEST.A rifle which has suc-cessfully withstood a proof test load withoutshowing signs of inetal fatigue; NOTE: Prooftest loads are nearly always apprbximately20,000 PSI above standard ammunition.

PROPELLENT.That which provides theenergy for propelling a bullet, shell, or thelike; also a fuel, either powder or liquid, forpropelling a rocket or the like.

PROTE ST.A formal objection to methodsor procedures of operation, equipment, scor-ing, or score, at a shooting competition madeby a competitor.

(PSI) POUNDS PER SQ. INCH.A unit ofmeasure used to evaluate the pressure in achamber or cylinder.

PYROCELLULOSE.A variety of pyroxy-lin, used m making smokeless powders andgelatin dynamites.

QUALIFICATION.Describes an individ-ual who has fired a score of marksman orhigher over a qualifying course in i'ecord

117'


QUITTING SIGHTS.-in sighting, the phySi-cal and/or mental interruption of concentra-tion, Most frequently caused by letting theeye leave its focus on the front sight andglancing at target.

RAIL.-A strip of metal usually 12" to18" long with a slot the length of the rail toattach forearm stop and palm rest .adapterfor the international rifle. It'alsols used asa foundation to countersink all the guardscrews for securing rifle and stock to-gether. in some instances set triggers areinletted into the rail so they can easily beremoved without the removal of barrel anuaction.

RAIL MOUNTS. - In international riflebuilding the adaptors used to secure, i.e.,palmrest to rifle rail are called rail mounts.NOTE: Metallic and scope sight which aresecured on a long metal base to permit for-ward and rearward movemeAt are sometimescalled rail mounts. A more common name isdove-tail mounts.

RAMP. -An inclined plane, de signed to giveproper elevation of front or rear sights.

RANGE.-A prescribed area where weap-ons firing is conducted; includes firing line;butts, target frames, pits and ;impact area.

RANGE FLAG,--=A red flag used to indi-cate whether or not firing is being conductedon the range. Firing is in progress whenflag is raised to its highest position on theflag pole.

RANGE OFFICER. The individual incharge of all firing on any given range.

RAPID FIRE.-(a) Service Rifle: fired at200 yds-10 shots, 50 seconds, and at 300 yds-10 shots, 60 seconds. With manually op-erafed rifle (bolt-action) and 10 seconds foreach range. (b) In pistol there are three dif-ferent rapid fire courses: (1) NRA-5 shotsin 10 seconds, Standard American Target.(2).AFQC-6 shots in 15 seconds, and 6 shotsin 30 seconds, from various positions atMilitary E Target. (3) International Rapidfire consistsof firIng 5 shots at 5 silhouettetargets in 8, 6, and 1 seconds.

RATTLE BATTLE.-The slang term usedin describing the Infantry Trophy Rifle-TeamMatch.

READY COMMANDS. - These commandsare, Is the Line Ready? The line is Ready.Ready on the Right, Ready on the Left, and-Ready on the Firing Line." Commdnds usedto ascertain if personnel areready to com-mence firing.

READY LINE.-The area just to the rearof the firing line, where competitors who areto fire on the next relay must wait their turn.

REAMER.--A tool used to enlarge a holesuch as the primer pocket- of a cartridge.

RECEIVER.-The basic unit of a firearir, ,especially a small arm, to which the barreland other components 'are attached.

RECEIVER BRIDGE. -A web or connectorused to span the recess of a receiver to in-crease its strength. Also, in some weapons,used in conjunction with the firing pin tang,to prevent weapon from firing until breech iscompletely locked.

RECEIVER SIGHT.-Rear sight mountedon the receiver of the weapon.

RECOIL.-The backward movement of =agun or part thereof on firing, caused by thebackward pressu 'e of the propellent gases;the distance the a gun or part travels in thisbackward moves lent.

ECOIL EN GY.-The force in foot-pounds exerted rearward by a'firearm whenfired.

RECOIL LUG.- -A metal surface, normallylocated in the forward part of the action whichtransmits the recoil of the barrel and receivergroup to the stock.

RECOIL PAD. -A cushioneattache-Far-thebutt of a shotgun' or rifle to absorb recoil.

RECORD FIRING.-The act of firing aqualification course for a score to be placedin an individual's file.

RE-DISK.---To have the value of the shoot-.er's last shot or shots re-indicated.

REDUCED TARGET. A standard targetthat is reduced in size proportionally, to befired at a shorter range. A standard targetwhere the scoring rings have been reducedin size proportionally to the distance at whichthe target will be fired from.

RE-ENTRY.-A match in which the com-petitor is permitted to fire more than onescore for the record; one or more of thehighest scores being considered to determine

118


the relative rank of competitors. Then num-ber of scores. wh ch may be fired, and thenumber of high scores to be considered indeciding the relative rank of competitorsmust be specified in the program.

RE- FACT. To put a new target face onbacking material.

REFEREE.--A person to whom anythingis referred .for decigion. In spores, a judgeof a' game, an umiiire. TI1 compFcitive shoot-ing, depending upon the orgariz2iion exercis-ing jurisdictional control, di.ies and powersof enforcement of a refelee are varied.Basically, he bnfoyces the rules of a match.

RE -FIRE. The firing of a string Or stageof fire over again after it has once beenfired.

REGIONAL MA TCHE S.A registeredmatch sponsored by the NRA for a specificregion or area in which a NBPRP Excellencein- Competition Match may be included.

REGISTERED MATCH.Any match reg-istered with' the NRA. A registered matchis the only match where a national recordmay be set.

RE LAY. The term used to describe sepa-rate groups of shooters for identificationpurposes and to insure efficient supervisionof a match. Relays are usually based on thenumber of targets available. Example: 50targets and 100 competitors would require2 relays. Shooters must know their relaynumber to avoid confusion when competitorsare called to the firing line.

RELOADING DIES. Tools used in re-loading ammunition, such as seizing, and de-capping die, seating and crimping die, etc.

RELOADING TOOL. A machine or de-vice used in the hand loading of ammunition.

REPEATING. Usually referring to aself-loading type weapon automatic or semi-automatic. May also be used in reference toslide or lever action weapons.

RESIZLNG.A process whereby a car-tridge case is swaged to a desired size orshape.

REST.A support for a gun while firing.May mean the firearm is held physically bythe shooter utilizing additional means of sup-port such as sandbags, trees, rocks, logs, orbench rest. Weapon may be held by mechan-ical means such as a machine rest. In

119

competitive shooting., various organizationshave established rules governing what con-stitutes artifical or ,additional support.

RETICLE. - -A system of-lines, wires, orthe like, in the focus of the eyepiece of anoptical instrument. Also called a reticule.One of the fine wires or threads mounted asa reticle in the focus of the eyepiece of op-tical instruments, and used to define the lineof sight with accuracy.

REVOLVER. A handgun having a rotatingcylinder carrying several rounds of ammu-nition, each round being in a chamber thatcomes into line with the barrel before theround is fired.

RIB.A liner piece of metal attached tothe uppermost part Of\the slide or barrel.Used to raise the sightingplane, improve theappearance of the weapon, and to reducebarrel vibration.

RICHOCHET.Of a bomb, bullet, or thelike. To skip, bounce or fly .off at an angleafter striking an object or surface.

RIFLE .(MATCH GRADE). Conamercalor ordnance type weapons designed for ormodified to competition specifications.

RIFLED SLUG. A projectile used in shot-gun ammunition with spiralled.. grooves, thetheory being that the air forced through thegrooves, while the projectilels in flight tendsto spin the slug to effect stAiiity.

RIFLING.(a) See also Lands andGroove.The action of cutting spiral longitudinalgrooves in the bore of a gun barrel. (b) Thespiral grooves cut in the bore of the barrelsof certain types_of firearms and cannon.

RIM. The outer or extreme circumfer-ence on the head of a cartridge used for head.spacing in some cases and for extraction also.

RIM FIRE .A cartridge in which the prim-ing mixture is placed in the fold of the headof the shell, as in Cal. 22 rimfire cartridges.

RIMLESS.A cartridge case design inwhich the case bears no rim about the head.The extractor in this case will fit into anextractor groovee-p%out the head of the case.

RIMMED CARTRIDGE.--A cartridge whoserim extends beyond the cartridge case to con-trol headspace mid facilitate extraction.

RUPTURED CARTRIDGE. A cartridgecase that is deformed with partial or completecircumferential separation around the body.


SAFETY.A mechanical continuance on a\weapon to keep it from accidently discharg-ing a cartridge.

SAFETY FAN.The 35° area to the leftand right of the line of fire on That which. isconsidered the dkinger zone.

SAMI.A Nal/Iv Small Arms Marksman-ship Instructor With a Navy Enlisted', Classi-fication of GM-0811..

SATU,The Small Arms Training Unitlocated at San Diego, ealifornia.

Scaled Round. A round of ammo. whichhas been placed in chamber of 0. 110'. weaponand heated, or a round heated from the sun.

SCATTER GUN.A slang term for shot-gun.

SCHNABEL.The tip of the forearm whenit is made in' pointed or ornamental formnamed from the German word for a "bird'beak,"

SCHUETZEN.Type of hook used in po-sition shooting.

SCOPE.Short for telescope.SCOPE MOUNTS.That portion of a tele-

scope that attaches the telescope to another'object, normally the scope bases.

SCORE.The total value of all the re-quired shots fired by a competitor in anyone match or course of fire.

SCORE BOARD.Device used, for posting.'of match scores for information of competi-tors and interested individuals.

SCORE BOOK.A book used to maintaina chronologial record of shooting.

SCORE CARD.A printed form on whichshots fired are recorded.

SCORER.Anyone appointed or designatedby duly authorized match officials to recordscores fired.

SCORING:The act of keeping a score.SCORING PLUG. In scoriiig, a device

used to determine whether more than onebullet has penetrated a single hole, or to de-termine the correct value of a shot on thetarget.

SEAR.That part of the lockwork of afirearm that engages the hammer or strikerto hold it in a cocked position.

SEAR NOSE.A portion of the sear whichengages into the sear notch of the hammer orstriker' of a weapon.

120

SEAR NOTCH.A place on thehaMmer orstriker in which the sear engages to holdstriker or hammer to the rear.

SEASON CRACKING.Usually refers to asmall split in the cartridge brass case whichoccurs when brass is old and the grain struc-ture of the brass is relaxed. Also refers tosmall cracks that appear in gunstocks clue tomoisture content changes.

SECTIONAL DENSITY.The weight ofbullet in grains, divided by its diameter.

SEIVIIAUTOMATIC.Of'a firearm or gun;utilizing part of the force of an explodingcartridge to extract the empty case andchamber the next round, but 'reqUiring aseparate pull on the trigger to fire eachround.

SEMI- RIMMED. A cartridge case designin which'the case head bears both a rim anda hollow groove for the extractor.

SERRATED TRIGGER.Trigger with faceknurled, stippled or a series of small groovesto prevent lose of finger placement.

SERVICE. See Rifle-Service.SE R VICE AMMUNITION.Ammunition

manufactured for the purpose of firing incombat, or to simulate combat.

SET TRIGGER.A device for lighteningthe trigger pull at will; in order to removethe disturbing effect of a heavy pull in targetshooting. Us'ually two triggers are used, therear trigger sets the sear, while alight touchon the front trigger will discharge the arm.

SHARPSHOOTER.See Classification.SHELL.--A siangterm for cartridge ease.SHELL TIOLDER--7Tool used in rifle car-

tridge reloading for purpose of facilitatingease of maintaining cartridge case withinloadi'.g press.

SHIM UP.A liner or thin piece of mate-rial used for placing between surfaces tosecure proper adjustments (i.e., sight baseto receivers, etc.).

SHOOT-EM-OFF.A command used by arifle team coach during rapid fire when theshooter is about to run out of time.

SHOOTING BOX.Container used to carryshooting equipment.

SHOOTING GLOVE ,A special glove. usedby rifie.shooters to protect he hand that isplaced between the fore-end and the sling.

Apperdix RKSMANSHIP DICTIONARY

SHOOTING UNIFORM. Any distinctivegarb worn by shooting. teams.

SHOT.(a) Terminology applied to a firedround. (b) A component used in the manufac-ture of shot shells.

SHOTGUN.A smooth bore gun, used forfiring a charge of small shot at short range,as in hunting small game.

SHOTSHELL.Cartridge commonly usedwith shotguns.

SHOT STRING.--A term used in shotgunshooting. The elongation of the shot pattern.

SHORT TRIGGER.Usually refers to thestandardA I1911A1 45 automatic pistol triggeror the standard length commercial trigger.

SHOULDER HUNCH.Similar to flinch. Areaction of the shoulder jacket to protect theshoulder.

SIDE BY SIDE.---A weapon with two bar-rels placed next to each other.

SIDE LOCK. Hammer offset to side ofbreech.

SIDE MOUNT. A metal fixture with ringsused to secure a telescope sight to the sideof a rifle barrel and/or receiver.

SIGHT.A device through which the tar-get is viewed to give proper elevation anddirection.

SIGHT ALIGNMENT.When the front andrear sights are brought into correct adjust-ment with the.-6m

SIGHT PICTURE. Upon achieving propersight alignment a sight picture is obtained byplacing the target or bull's-eye into view.

SIGHT RADII'S. The distance from thefront to the rear sight.

SIGHTING SHOTS.Shots fired at a tar-get provided for that purpose and used toobtain desired information relative to adjust-ment of sights for the match which imme-diately follows.

SILENCER. A device fixed to muzzle,baffle propelling gases, silencing soundwaves.

SINGLE ACTION.--(a) A firearm whosehammer must be cockea by hand before theweapon can be fired. (b) Type of fire, madepossibly by cocking the hammer, with adouble-action revolver.

SINGLE BASE POWDER. A type ofsmokeless powder, made of nitro-celluloseprimarily.

121

SINGLE SHOT.A weapon that is capableof loading with one round (non-repeating fire-arm).

SINGLE TRIGGER.Common type trigger,as opposed to double, set type.

SITTING POSITION.One of the positionsuseci in LIRA rifle competition. Weight of thebody supported on buttocks and feet or ankles,no other portion of the body touching theground. The rifle will be supported by bothhands and one shoulder only/The left hand(or in the case of a left-haAted shooter, theright hand) must not restA leg or knee. Theelbow will rest appro)ermately on or just in-side the knee. Thy' legs may be apart orcrossed at the opt/on of the firer.

SIZING.ToAape cast bullet to desireddiameter or cartridge case to specified di-mensions.

SKEET.A Jhotgtm sport in which claytargets are thrown from a high house (12 ft.above the ground) and a low house (2 ft. abovethe ground). The shooter fires from eightdifferent positions which are toyed out on asemi-circle with the 8th position at the centerof the diameter of the semi-circle. A roundof skeet consists of 25 shots with a maximumof 25 points. -

SKID. SHOT.An elongated bullet hole ofany length caused by a bullet entering the tar-get while target is turning into or out of view.

SLING.A leather or web strap used tohelp support a rifle during. firing.

SLOW FIRE.Known distance firing. Usu-ally a -time allowance of one minute per shotis authorized.

SMALL OF STOCK. 4 name usually ap-plied to the "hand" of the butt stock. Com-monly called pistol grip.

SMALLBORE.Normally refers to a .22caliber rim fire cartridge or weapons cham-bered for such cartridge.

SMOKELESS POWDER.A nitrocellulosebase powder, sometimes compounded withnitroglycerine.

SMOOTHBORE.A firearm with no rifling.SOFT POINT B U L L E T S.Sometimes

these are called softnosed, dum-clum, ormushroom bullets. This type of bullet has anon-fouling jacket filled with a lead or leadalloy core, closed at the base, and with thelead ex-posed at the nose.


SOLVENT.--(a) A. liquid capable of dis-solving powder residue. (b) A solution ofether and alcohol to cool the burning ofsmokeless powder.

SPEED LOCK.A trigger and hammerdesigned for extra fast 'hammer fall.

SPIN.The bullet revolving around its ownaxis caused by the rifling.

SPITZER.Pointed bullet..SPOT WELD.In rifle shooting, the act of

fitting the face to the stock or thumb so thatduring recoil, the face will remain in contactwith the stock and/or thumb.

SPOTTER.A round disk with a spindlethrough the middle used to indicate the pointof impact on the target.

SPOTTING SCOPE.A telescope used byshooters to visually check hits or spotters ontargets.

SQUADDING.The process of assigning adefinite relay or target to an individual' ofteam.

SQUEEZE.A term used to define the in-dependent rearward motion of the triggerfinger on the trigger until a weapon fires.

SQUIB ROUND.A round of ammunitionwith little or no powder charge.

STAGE.In a match fired at more thanone range, position, or class of firing, eachrange, position, or class of firing is referredto as a "stage" of the match.

STAKE.One method of tightening or se-curing a screw or pin in a hole. Usually donewith a punch of ,some type.

STATISTICAL OFFICER. The chief ofstatistical officer is in charge of all statis-tical work in connection with the match ex-cept the actual recording of scores when thisis done on the range. He is assisted by suchassistant statistical officers as may be re-quired.

STIPPLING.The roughing of metal toimprove the gripping surface, in lieu ofc hecke ring.

STOCK.(a) The foundation for securingthe rifle barrel and action to a useable han-dling piece usually niade of wood and ofstandard measurement to fit the averageperson. (b) The wooden part of a firearm,especially a shoulder weapon.

STOPPAGE.An interruption of the cycleof operation. A jam in an automatic weapon.

122

STOVE PIPE .A malfunction of the weaponcaused by a cartridge case being jammed(caught) in the action of the weapon and point-ing upward. ,It appears somewhat like astove pipe.

STREAMER. The red cloth,flag (approxi-mately 18 ft. by 7 ft.) used as the primaryrange danger flag and posted at a prominentnoint on the range so it is visible by anyoneapproaching or on. the range. All firing willcease at anytime this flag is hauled down.

STRIATION.A furrow channel, smallgroove, or channel. A thread like line orna4-ow band; especially when one of a seriesof parallel

STRIKER.A firing pin or a projection ofthe hammer of a firearm, which strikes theprimer in a fuze or in a round of ammunition.

STRING.A string is a group. of shotsforming a part of a "stage."

SUPERPOSED. The placement of one ob-ject on top of the other such as an Over andUnder shotgun.

SUPERVISOR.A supervisor is requiredat all NRA approved tournaments. The su-pervisor may be an NRA official referee,or an officer of an NRA Club, League or Stateassociation who is familiar with NRA com-petition rules and Match procedure. Thesupervisor may also act as executive officerof an approved tournament in such combinedduty as authorized by the NRA headquarters.He acts as an official referee.

SUSTAINED FIRE.Same .as rapid fire.Shooting a predetermined number of roundsin a specified time limit.

JWAGE.A method of shaping metalthrough a die by pressure.

SWIVEL.The small piece in a shotgunlock connecting the tumbler and mainspring.In revolvers, it is used to connect the springand the hammer. The oblong loop used toconnect the sling strap to the barrel acidstock of a rifle is called swivel blow.

TAKE MORE WHITE.In high power rifleteam matches, a coach's command to hold aline of white rifle team matches, a coach'scommand to hold a line of white between frontsight and six o'clock hold on bull's-eve. Thisin turn will cause the shooter to lower hisshot group.


TANG.--A metal strip attached to the re-ceiver and picjectifig towards tl e butt. toassist -insectiring barrel.-tb the stock., Jnmuzzle loacThig arms'usually forbad in onepiece with the breech plug.

TARGE T.The object at which the shooteraims.

TARGET BUTTS.See Butts.TARGET FRAME.A frame into 'which

the target is inserted or mounted.TARGET OPERATION.The manipulations

of the targets.TARGET PITS.Area used for operation

of the targets, also the protective area fromwhich target handlers operate.

TARGET PULLER.--One who raises andlowers the target; target handler.

TARGET SPOTTERS.See Spotters.TEAM.A group of shooters firing for a

composite score.TEAM CAPTAIN. The person responsible

for all duties and for the discipline of histeam members.

TEAM COACH.Deputy to the team cap-tain. The teams shooting instructor.

TEAM SYNCHRONIZATION.Zeroing allteam weapons.

TEAM TROPHY MATCH.See NationalTrophy Match.

TELEGRAPHXC MAT C E S.Matcheswhere competitors fire on their home rangesand whexelkmscores are exchanged by tele-graph' &means.

TELEPHONE OPERATORS.Used on thefiring line and in the pits to relay commands.

TELESCOPIC SIGHTS.Any sight whichmagnifies.

TERMINAL VE LOC ITY Th'e c on s t anrtvelocity of a falling body attained when theresistance of air or other ambient fluid hasbecome equal to the force of gravity actingupon the body.

TERSULPHIDE OF ANTIMONY. Agentused in hardening bullet metal.

THROAD.The tapered portion/of a bar;rel'extending from the end of the Chamber/to'the beginning of the rifling.

TIE.Two ar more individuals or teamsscoring the same amount of points.

TIE BREAKING.Any system, or set ofrules, used by various shooting organizationsto determine who is the winner, when two

more individuals or teams have identicalscores.

TIME FIRE.-5 Shots in 20 se,,conds witha pistol or revolver,

TiME LIMITS. --The periods of time givenfor various stringS or stages of fire with anyweapon.

TIP SHOT.A slightly elongated bullethole in target caused by 'h. bullet that hastipped over in flight and was not rotatingtruly on its longitudinal axis.

TOE.--The l.owest,portion Of the butt of arifle or shotgun stock when weapon is in nor-mal firing position.

TOP MOUNT.A metal fixture with ringsused to secure a telescope sight to the top ofa rifle barrel and/or receiver -

TRACER.(a) A projectile that has achemical compound which gives trail oflight indicating the flight of the projectile.(b) The pyrotechnic composition in a bullet.

. TRAINFIRE. A new system of rifle-marksmanship adapted by the U.S. Army,composed of four phases. The first phase isgiven to all mate soldiersupon entry in theArmy and consists of Pro-mark, Field Firing,Target Detection and a Recoi'd Firing. Phasetwo teaches Squad-Combat Firing. Phasethree provides Sniper Training. Phase four,consists of extreme distance firing for out-.standing marksmen.

TRAJECTORY.--The curve on the-verticalplane traced by a bullet, shell, bomb or otherobject thrown, launched- or trajected. by anapplied exterior force, the projectilecontinu-ing in motion.aiter separation from the force.. TRAP.A shotgun sport in which clay

target's, are thrown at a fixed height withinan angle of 130°. The trap house is located16 feet from each of the five positions from,which the competitor fires five shots from".each, giving a maximum score. If 25 points.

TRIANGULATION.A sighting and aimingexercise.

TRIGGER:',-A mechanism which; whenpulled, as with the- finger, releases, anothermechanism, as in the trigger of a gun.

TRIGGER CONTROL. The tomove the trigger until the sear disengages,the hammer goes forward and the Weapondischarges, without any movement of theweapon.

123


TRIGGER CONVINCER. --kA mechanicaldevice that allows a coach to fi\re the weaponwhile it is being held and"tiimed\ty the pupil.

TRIGGER CREEP.An undesir,ed move-ment of the trigger before the sear discon-nects.

'RIGGER GUARD.A protecting part of aweapon that encircles the trigger, preventingdamage or accidental firing.

TRIGGER MASH.Slang term for triggercontrol-squev4e.

TRIGGER 'PULL amount of weightnecessary to actuatecthOri0;er. (b) Thelength of trigger traveedir"-ii-X--actuation.

TRIGGER SHOE. -A dIviee designed forwidening the trigger.

TRIGGER,'SQUEEZE.See Trigger Con-trol.

TRIGGER STOP.Pre v ent s excessiverearward'Iravel of the trigger after sear/striker release.

TRIGGER WEIGHT.The number ofpounds of,"Pressure necessary to actuate atrigger (i.e., a trigger that requires a forceof 3 pounds to actuate it _would be describedas a 3 lb. __trigger, hence the term trigger

TROPHY.The representation of such amemorial, as on a medal; given for an out-standing achievement.

TUBE SIGHT.Front or rear sight that isprotected by a cube against the elements.Rear tube type sights usually incorporate anadjustment system for moving the sights thatis similar either to a telescopic sight ormicrometer rear.

TUMBLE.g.The hammer, so-called of ahammerless gun.

TWIST.The distance (in inches) a bullettravels through the barrel to make one coin -plete revolution.

TYRO (AS PER NRA).--A competitor whohas ndt previously fired in organized civilian,police or military pistol competitions,, re-gardless of the courses of fire composingsuch matches. Any tournament sponsor mayinclude in his program a prize schedule ofaward(s) for-the tyro class.-

UNCLASSIFIED (COMPETITIVE). Se eClassification. A competitor. who has notfired in NRA pistol or rifle competition

124

during' the previous three (3) years or whohas riot been classified as a master. Suchcompetitor shall, unless he can qualify as atyro, fire through his first NRA competition(or first competition following the loss of hisclassification) in the unclassified group, ex-cept he may, if he so chooses, be placed inthe master class. A competitor in the un-classified group may compete only for placeawards or awards offered in the unclassifiedgroup in individual matches. Undercut. Aterm that vnuld apply to the front sight of apistol,- that las a portion cut forwarJ t oduce glare.

UNLOAD.To remove magazine aid/oram nunition.

UNLOCK.To plzi: the safet' in firing po-sition.

UNQUALIFIED.See Qualification. Nethaving requisite qualifications.

re-

V-COUNT.---The total number of hits inthe "V" ring. Previously used in Mil "A"and "J3" targets; used now only in "C"target.

VELOCITY.Speed, or rate of motion, ina given direction and in a- given frame ofreference,.

VENTXLATED RIB.A strip of Metal(usually steel) running the full length of ashotgun barrel with rectangular holes evenlyspaced to help eliminate heat waves fromthe line sight and produce a flat sightingplane.

VERIFY.To ascertain as to legaliV.VERTEX.The highest point above the

weapon reached by the trajectory is calledits vertex.

VISIBLE HITS.Total number of hits' ona target that are visible to the naked eye.

"V" RING.An inner circle placed insidethe bull's-eye of certain U. S. Military &NRA targets, for the purpose of rankingscores without changing the numerical valueof the total score. As a "-hit in the bull's-eyecounts 5, a hit in the ,smaller circle within;he bull' 3 -eye would also count 5, but forpurposes of differentiation, is called RomanNumeral five ("V") which has a mathematicalvalue of 5.

WAD.--A used in shotgun shellsto retain powder charge and control gases.


WAD CUTTER.A term used to describea lead bullet which cuts cleanly- thtiough thetarget upon impact.: Cartridges containingthese bullets usually have a reduced load. InCenter Fire Pistol Competition, Wad Cutteris defined as ammunition other than Ball.

WEIGHING TRIGGERS.Testing weaponsto determine how much actual weight is re-quired on the trigger to disengage the searand allow the hammer to go forward.

WILD CAT.An individually developedcartridge not commercially manufactured.

WINDAGE.Moving the windage adjust-ment of a weapon to compensate for wideshots caused by either wind or misalignmentof the sights.

WIND DOPING, - Calculating the velocityinci'direction of the windby means of a tele-scope or other visual means.

WIND FLAG. Fla used to indicate dir ec-_lion and velocity of the wind.

WIND GAUGE.--(a) Apparatus used, as inconnection with target firing, to determine

125

and sometimes record the force and directionof the wind.. It comprises an anemometer anda wind vane. (b) A graduated scale on therear sight of a small arms rifle whereby thesight may be adjusted to correct the devia-tion of -trtebullet due to a wind componentperpendicular to the line of fire. The cor-responding scale on sights for cannon iscalled a deflection scale.

X-COUNT. See "X" Ring. The totalnumber of X's or:.,,center shots fired.

"X" RING.An inner circle placed insidethe 10-ring or a 10-ring target, for purposesof r;mking scores without numerically chang-ing the total score. As a hit in the 10-ringcounts 10, a hit in the smaller circle is still10, but for purposes of differc. .i.ation; iscalled Roman Numeral ten ("X''), which hasa mathematical value of 10,

ZERO. To adjust the sight settings of agun by calibrating results of firings.

Documents

DOCUNEWT- RESUME - ERIC - Education Resources .... Treat every gun ?s if it wei;e loaded. Never take anyone's word that the gun is empty. Check for yourself and keep yOUr.finger off/the